342
Title page Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager 1626LM Optical Network Design Platform (ONDP) | Release 7.0 User Guide 3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Issue 4 | March 2013

3AL75223RAAATQZZA_V1_1626 Light Manager 1626LM Optical Network Design Platform (ONDP) Release 7.0 User Guide.pdf

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Title page

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager

1626LM Optical Network Design Platform (ONDP) | Release 7.0

User Guide

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA

Issue 4 | March 2013

Legal notice

Legal notice

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective

owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.

Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.

Security Statement

In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event,

applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any

allowances or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.

Limited Warranty

For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.

Ordering information

The ordering number for this product guide is 3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA.

To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, contact your local sales representatives or use Online Customer Support (OLCS) https://support.lucent.com

(http://support.alcatel-lucent.com).

Contents

About this document

Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................... xixxix

Intended audience ...................................................................................................................................................................... xixxix

How to use this information product ................................................................................................................................... xixxix

Related documents ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxxx

Related training ........................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxi

Technical support ....................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxi

How to order ................................................................................................................................................................................ xxixxi

Quality policy ............................................................................................................................................................................. xxiixxii

How to comment ....................................................................................................................................................................... xxiixxii

1 Introduction

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11-1

Features ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-21-2

Functionality ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-81-8

The ONDP Interface ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-91-9

2 Installation and Startup

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12-1

Installation Requirements ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-22-2

Installer Welcome Window ................................................................................................................................................... 2-42-4

InstallShield Wizard Window ............................................................................................................................................... 2-62-6

Install ONDP .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-72-7

Update ONDP Version .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-102-10

Uninstall ONDP ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-122-12

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

iii

Launch ONDP ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-132-13

Close ONDP ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-142-14

3 ONDP User Interface

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-13-1

Main Menu and Toolbar ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-23-2

Map Legend .............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-133-13

4 Design Inputs

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14-1

Section 1: Starting the Design

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-34-3

Design Inputs .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-44-4

Incremental Design .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-64-6

Create a New Project ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-94-9

Open an Existing Project (.ondp file) .............................................................................................................................. 4-114-11

Section 2: Sites

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-134-13

Sites ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-144-14

Create Sites ............................................................................................................................................................................... 4-244-24

Edit NE Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-264-26

Edit Site Parameters .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-284-28

Delete Sites ............................................................................................................................................................................... 4-294-29

Section 3: ILAs

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-304-30

ILAs ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-314-31

Change ILA Site Name ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-344-34

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

iv 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Section 4: Links and Spans

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-364-36

Links and Spans ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-374-37

Create Links and Spans ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-464-46

Edit Links and Spans ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-474-47

Add Spans to Links ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-484-48

Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span ................................................................................................... 4-504-50

Merge Spans ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-524-52

Delete Links and Spans ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-544-54

Identify a Link on the Map ................................................................................................................................................. 4-554-55

Section 5: Relations and Services

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-564-56

Relations and Services .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-574-57

Create a Relation .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-784-78

Edit Relations and Services ................................................................................................................................................ 4-794-79

Create Services ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-804-80

Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service ......................................................................................... 4-824-82

Delete Relations and Services ........................................................................................................................................... 4-844-84

Identify a Relation on the Map .......................................................................................................................................... 4-854-85

Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints .............................................................................................................................. 4-864-86

Section 6: Optical Subsets

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-884-88

Optical Subsets ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-894-89

Create Optical Subset ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-974-97

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-984-98

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

v

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) ............................................................................................................................................... 4-994-99

Failures Scope ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1054-105

Create an SRG ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1094-109

Include/Exclude Links/Sites in SRGs ........................................................................................................................... 4-1104-110

Delete SRGs ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1114-111

Edit a Failures Scope .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-1124-112

Section 8: Design Parameters

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1144-114

Design Parameters ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-1154-115

WDM Layer Design Parameters .................................................................................................................................... 4-1174-117

Traffic Setting Design Parameters ................................................................................................................................. 4-1224-122

Set Design Parameters ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-1254-125

5 Run the Network Design

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15-1

The Network Design ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-25-2

Run the Full Network Design ............................................................................................................................................... 5-45-4

Run Partial Network Designs for Links ........................................................................................................................... 5-55-5

6 Design Results

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16-1

Design Results and Reports .................................................................................................................................................. 6-26-2

Show/Tune Selected Links Design .................................................................................................................................... 6-36-3

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................... 6-66-6

Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria ....................................................................................... 6-156-15

Show Graphical Statistics .................................................................................................................................................... 6-176-17

Show Network Statistics ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-216-21

Show Failures Report ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-246-24

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

vi 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Show GMRE Audit Logs ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-316-31

Show Traffic Design Logs .................................................................................................................................................. 6-346-34

Show Errors Report ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-356-35

Show Bill of Material ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-376-37

Show Bill of Material (multi-step) ................................................................................................................................... 6-386-38

Show Sites/Part List .............................................................................................................................................................. 6-396-39

Show Equipment View ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-406-40

Show Line View ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6-416-41

Export Design Results Excel Report ............................................................................................................................... 6-456-45

Export BoM .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-716-71

7 Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17-1

Network Configuration in ONDP ...................................................................................................................................... 7-27-2

Network Analysis: Audit ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-47-4

Network Analysis: Upgrade .................................................................................................................................................. 7-77-7

Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis — GMRE Simulator ................................................................................ 7-97-9

8 Modifications for ONDP Design

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-18-1

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts .................................................................................... 8-28-2

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface ..................................................................................... 8-78-7

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Concepts .................................................................................. 8-158-15

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface ................................................................................... 8-168-16

9 Map Management

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-19-1

Map Generation ......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-29-2

Launch the Map Generation Application ......................................................................................................................... 9-79-7

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

vii

Generate a Background Map ................................................................................................................................................ 9-89-8

Glossary

Index

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

viii 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

List of tables

2-1 Minimum PC Requirements .................................................................................................................................. 2-22-2

3-1 File menu descriptions ............................................................................................................................................. 3-23-2

3-2 Edit menu descriptions ............................................................................................................................................ 3-33-3

3-3 Display menu descriptions ..................................................................................................................................... 3-43-4

3-4 Inputs menu descriptions ........................................................................................................................................ 3-53-5

3-5 Design menu descriptions ....................................................................................................................................... 3-73-7

3-6 Reports menu descriptions ..................................................................................................................................... 3-83-8

3-7 Tools menu descriptions ....................................................................................................................................... 3-103-10

3-8 Misc menu descriptions ........................................................................................................................................ 3-103-10

3-9 Toolbar icon descriptions ..................................................................................................................................... 3-113-11

3-10 Site icons .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-133-13

3-11 Traffic Icons .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-153-15

3-12 Topology Map pop-up menu ............................................................................................................................... 3-153-15

3-13 Site pop-up menu .................................................................................................................................................... 3-163-16

3-14 Link pop-up menu ................................................................................................................................................... 3-173-17

3-15 Relation pop-up menu ........................................................................................................................................... 3-193-19

4-1 Edit menu Incremental Design descriptions .................................................................................................... 4-64-6

4-2 Types of sites ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-144-14

4-3 Edit NE window ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-194-19

4-4 Edit Sites window pop-up menu ........................................................................................................................ 4-214-21

4-5 Site parameters ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-214-21

4-6 Edit Sites window button actions ...................................................................................................................... 4-234-23

4-7 ILA parameters ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-324-32

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

ix

4-8 Edit ILAs window pop-up menu ....................................................................................................................... 4-334-33

4-9 Links table pop-up menu ..................................................................................................................................... 4-384-38

4-10 Links parameters ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-394-39

4-11 Mixed fiber types with DSF length restriction ............................................................................................. 4-414-41

4-12 Links table button actions .................................................................................................................................... 4-414-41

4-13 Spans table pop-up menu .................................................................................................................................... 4-424-42

4-14 Span parameters ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-434-43

4-15 Spans table button actions .................................................................................................................................... 4-454-45

4-16 Relations table pop-up menu ............................................................................................................................. 4-594-59

4-17 Working [W] Constraints pop up menu ........................................................................................................... 4-604-60

4-18 Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu ......................................................................................................... 4-614-61

4-19 Relations parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 4-624-62

4-20 Relations table button actions ............................................................................................................................. 4-644-64

4-21 Services table pop-up menu ............................................................................................................................... 4-654-65

4-22 Line View... pop up menu .................................................................................................................................... 4-674-67

4-23 Topo Highlight...pop up menu ............................................................................................................................ 4-684-68

4-24 Working [W] Constraints pop up menu ........................................................................................................... 4-684-68

4-25 Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu ......................................................................................................... 4-694-69

4-26 Services parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 4-704-70

4-27 Services table button actions ............................................................................................................................... 4-734-73

4-28 Optical Subset parameters .................................................................................................................................... 4-904-90

4-29 Edit Optical Subsets pop-up menu .................................................................................................................. 4-914-91

4-30 Optical Subsets table button actions ................................................................................................................ 4-924-92

4-31 Included menu ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-1024-102

4-32 Excluded menu ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-1034-103

4-33 Included menu ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-1064-106

4-34 Excluded menu ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-1074-107

List of tables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

x 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

5-1 Run Full Design icon coloration .......................................................................................................................... 5-35-3

6-1 Optical design parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 6-46-4

6-2 List of reported network design errors ............................................................................................................ 6-366-36

8-1 Board modification status description ................................................................................................................ 8-38-3

8-2 File menu commands and descriptions .............................................................................................................. 8-88-8

8-3 Edit menu commands and descriptions ............................................................................................................. 8-88-8

8-4 Display menu commands and descriptions ...................................................................................................... 8-98-9

8-5 NE level menu options .......................................................................................................................................... 8-118-11

8-6 Rack level menu options ...................................................................................................................................... 8-128-12

8-7 SubRack level menu options ............................................................................................................................... 8-128-12

8-8 Ports View pop-up menu ...................................................................................................................................... 8-188-18

8-9 Ports View window field descriptions ............................................................................................................. 8-198-19

List of tables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

xi

List of tables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xii 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

List of figures

1-1 The ONDP GUI .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-91-9

2-1 Installer Welcome window ..................................................................................................................................... 2-42-4

2-2 InstallShield Wizard window ................................................................................................................................ 2-62-6

3-1 File menu ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-23-2

3-2 Edit menu ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-33-3

3-3 Display menu .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-43-4

3-4 Inputs menu ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-53-5

3-5 Design menu ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-73-7

3-6 Reports menu .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-83-8

3-7 Misc. menu ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-103-10

3-8 Misc. menu ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-103-10

3-9 Help menu .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-103-10

3-10 Help window ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-113-11

3-11 Edge tooltip ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-143-14

3-12 Topology Map Pop menu ..................................................................................................................................... 3-153-15

3-13 Site pop-up menu .................................................................................................................................................... 3-163-16

3-14 Link pop-up menu ................................................................................................................................................... 3-173-17

3-15 Relation pop-up menu ........................................................................................................................................... 3-193-19

4-1 Init [ONDP] window ................................................................................................................................................ 4-54-5

4-2 Encrypt ONDP file on saving checkbox ........................................................................................................... 4-54-5

4-3 Edit menu Incremental Design options ............................................................................................................. 4-64-6

4-4 Step Slider window ................................................................................................................................................... 4-74-7

4-5 Edit NE window ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-194-19

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

xiii

4-6 Edit Sites window ................................................................................................................................................... 4-204-20

4-7 Edit Sites window pop-up menu ........................................................................................................................ 4-214-21

4-8 Edit ILAs window ................................................................................................................................................... 4-314-31

4-9 Edit ILAs window pop-up menu ....................................................................................................................... 4-334-33

4-10 Edit Spans window ................................................................................................................................................. 4-374-37

4-11 Links table pop-up menu ...................................................................................................................................... 4-384-38

4-12 Spans table pop-up menu ..................................................................................................................................... 4-424-42

4-13 Edit Services window ............................................................................................................................................ 4-584-58

4-14 Relations table pop-up menu .............................................................................................................................. 4-584-58

4-15 Topo Highlight... pop up menu .......................................................................................................................... 4-604-60

4-16 Working [W] Constraints pop up menu ........................................................................................................... 4-604-60

4-17 Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu ......................................................................................................... 4-614-61

4-18 Services table pop-up menu ................................................................................................................................ 4-654-65

4-19 Line View... pop up menu .................................................................................................................................... 4-674-67

4-20 Topo Highlight... pop up menu .......................................................................................................................... 4-684-68

4-21 Working [W] Constraints pop up menu ........................................................................................................... 4-684-68

4-22 Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu ......................................................................................................... 4-694-69

4-23 Edit Spectral Constraint window ....................................................................................................................... 4-754-75

4-24 Set Mutual Disjointness window ....................................................................................................................... 4-774-77

4-25 Edit Optical Subsets window .............................................................................................................................. 4-894-89

4-26 Edit Optical Subsets window pop-up menu .................................................................................................. 4-914-91

4-27 Edit Subset Mask window ................................................................................................................................... 4-954-95

4-28 Edit SRGs window Contents tab ..................................................................................................................... 4-1004-100

4-29 Edit SRGs window Parameters tab ................................................................................................................ 4-1014-101

4-30 SRG menu ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-1024-102

4-31 Included menu ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-1024-102

4-32 Excluded menu ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-1034-103

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xiv 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-33 Transfer buttons ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-1044-104

4-34 Included menu ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-1064-106

4-35 Excluded menu ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-1074-107

4-36 Transfer buttons ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-1084-108

4-37 Set Design Parameters window ....................................................................................................................... 4-1164-116

4-38 WDM Layer tab .................................................................................................................................................... 4-1174-117

4-39 Traffic Setting tab ................................................................................................................................................. 4-1224-122

6-1 Edit route optical design window ........................................................................................................................ 6-46-4

6-2 Path Feasibility window .......................................................................................................................................... 6-76-7

6-3 Optical design window ............................................................................................................................................ 6-86-8

6-4 Dispersion Map window ......................................................................................................................................... 6-96-9

6-5 Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics pop-up menu ....................................................................... 6-106-10

6-6 Chart Properties window - Title tab ................................................................................................................. 6-126-12

6-7 Chart Properties window - Plot tab ................................................................................................................... 6-136-13

6-8 Chart Properties window - Other tab ............................................................................................................... 6-146-14

6-9 Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria – 10G ..................................................................................................... 6-166-16

6-10 Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria – Mixed 10G/40G ............................................................................. 6-166-16

6-11 Spans Count graphical statistics example ...................................................................................................... 6-196-19

6-12 Access Load graphical statistics example ...................................................................................................... 6-206-20

6-13 Network Statistics report - General Statistics tab ........................................................................................ 6-226-22

6-14 Network Statistics report - Statistics on Step tab ........................................................................................ 6-236-23

6-15 Service Summary button ...................................................................................................................................... 6-246-24

6-16 Failures Report, Services tab .............................................................................................................................. 6-266-26

6-17 Failures Report, Scenarios tab ............................................................................................................................ 6-276-27

6-18 Failures Report, Filter tab .................................................................................................................................... 6-296-29

6-19 GMRE Audit Logs report — determining success of GMPLS dimensioning .................................. 6-326-32

6-20 GMRE Audit Logs report — evaluate tolerance of GMPLS restoration dimensioning ................ 6-336-33

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

xv

6-21 Traffic design logs report ..................................................................................................................................... 6-346-34

6-22 List Errors report ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-356-35

6-23 Bill of Material report ............................................................................................................................................ 6-376-37

6-24 Incremental Bill of Material report ................................................................................................................... 6-386-38

6-25 Part List report .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-396-39

6-26 Edit Equipments report ......................................................................................................................................... 6-406-40

6-27 Show Line View Display options ...................................................................................................................... 6-426-42

6-28 Line View (full spectrum) report ....................................................................................................................... 6-436-43

6-29 Line View (optimized) report ............................................................................................................................. 6-446-44

6-30 Excel Export Filtering window .......................................................................................................................... 6-456-45

6-31 Descriptive Sheet tab ............................................................................................................................................. 6-486-48

6-32 Map tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-496-49

6-33 Sites tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-506-50

6-34 Links tab ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-516-51

6-35 Relations tab .............................................................................................................................................................. 6-526-52

6-36 BOM tab ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-536-53

6-37 Part List Sites tab .................................................................................................................................................... 6-546-54

6-38 Design Service Summary tab .............................................................................................................................. 6-556-55

6-39 Restoration tab ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-566-56

6-40 Graph Statistics tab ................................................................................................................................................. 6-576-57

6-41 Inter-NE Links, LT and Node tab ...................................................................................................................... 6-586-58

6-42 NE Parameters tab .................................................................................................................................................. 6-596-59

6-43 Subsets tab ................................................................................................................................................................. 6-606-60

6-44 GMPLS Link Optical Parameters tab .............................................................................................................. 6-616-61

6-45 GMPLS AddDropType per Site ......................................................................................................................... 6-626-62

6-46 SRG tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-636-63

6-47 Network Design Logs tab .................................................................................................................................... 6-646-64

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xvi 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-48 OSNR NLP tab ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-656-65

6-49 CD tab ......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-666-66

6-50 PL Site X tab ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-676-67

6-51 SP Site-X Site-X tab ............................................................................................................................................... 6-686-68

6-52 Ser Site-X Site-X ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-696-69

6-53 DSF Mask 2 Forghieri grids tab ........................................................................................................................ 6-706-70

6-54 Export BoM report .................................................................................................................................................. 6-726-72

8-1 Add/Drop boards directions and sides ............................................................................................................... 8-48-4

8-2 Edit Equipments window ........................................................................................................................................ 8-78-7

8-3 Edit Equipments window File menu .................................................................................................................. 8-88-8

8-4 Edit Equipments window Edit menu .................................................................................................................. 8-88-8

8-5 Edit Equipments window Display menu ........................................................................................................... 8-98-9

8-6 Left navigation tree ................................................................................................................................................ 8-108-10

8-7 NE level menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-118-11

8-8 Rack level menu ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-118-11

8-9 SubRack level menu ............................................................................................................................................... 8-128-12

8-10 Edit Equipments window Main panel ............................................................................................................. 8-138-13

8-11 Edit Equipments window menu - all boards except concentrators ....................................................... 8-138-13

8-12 Edit Equipments window menu - concentrators .......................................................................................... 8-148-14

8-13 Ports View window - Example 1 ....................................................................................................................... 8-168-16

8-14 Ports View window - Example 2 ....................................................................................................................... 8-178-17

8-15 Ports View pop-up menu ...................................................................................................................................... 8-188-18

9-1 Map Calibration - Step 1 window ....................................................................................................................... 9-39-3

9-2 Map Calibration - Step 2 window ....................................................................................................................... 9-39-3

9-3 Map Calibration - Step 3 window ....................................................................................................................... 9-49-4

9-4 Map Calibration - Step 5 window ....................................................................................................................... 9-69-6

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

xvii

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xviii 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

About this documentAbout this document

Purpose

The Alcatel-Lucent Optical Network Design Platform User Guide (ONDP) provides a

detailed description of the Optical Network Design Platform User Guide (ONDP)

application and how to use it for network design.

Intended audience

ONDP users are Customer Capacity Planning Organizations, Customer Route Planners,

Customer and Alcatel-Lucent Network Designers. They will use this tool to design the

network equipment configurations and to design traffic services through the network.

In summary, this guide is intended for individuals responsible for:

• network designs

• pre-sales technical support and engineering

• technical support

• customer capacity planning organizations

• customer route planners

How to use this information product

This guide is divided into the following chapters. Refer to the Contents section to locate

specific information by chapter.

Chapter Description

Chapter 1, “Introduction” Describes the Optical Network Design Platform User

Guide (ONDP) features and functionality.

Chapter 2, “ Installation and Startup” Provides information on how to install, uninstall,

launch, and exit the ONDP application.

Chapter 3, “ ONDP User Interface” Provides information about the ONDP user interface.

Chapter 4, “Design Inputs” Provides information on inputs used to design and

plan a network.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

xix

Chapter Description

Chapter 5, “ Run the Network Design” Provides information on how to run the network

design.

Chapter 6, “Design Results” Provides information on how to retrieve and view

network design result and reports.

Chapter 7, “Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade” Provides information on performing network analysis

operations on an existing network.

Chapter 8, “Modifications for ONDP Design” Provides information on modifying shelves and

concentrator ports after running the ONDP design.

Chapter 9, “Map Management” Provides information on how to generate a new

default background map for the ONDP application

“Glossary” Provides a list of common terms and acronyms

Related documents

Alcatel-Lucent also provides the following documents to support the 1626 Light Manager

equipment:

DOCUMENT TYPE PRT NUMBER

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Product

Information and Planning Guide; Release 7.03AL-75223-AAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager User

Provisioning Guide; Release 7.03AL-75223-BAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager

Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide;

Release 7.0

3AL-75223-FAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Quick

Reference Guide; Release 7.03AL-75223-GAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Safety

Guide; Release 7.03AL-75223-HAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager System

Turn-Up Guide; Release 7.03AL-75223-JAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager TL1

Command Guide; Release 7.03AL-75223-KAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager

Installation Guide; Release 7.03AL-75223-LAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager

GMPLS/GMRE Guide; Release 7.03AL-75223-PAAA-TQZZA

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xx 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

DOCUMENT TYPE PRT NUMBER

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Optical

Network Design Platform (ONDP) User

Guide; Release 7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Optical

Network Design Platform (ONDP) Installation

Guide; Release 7.0

3AL-75223-SAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Data

Communication Network (DCN) Planning

Guide; Release 7.0

3AL-75223-TAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Customer

Documentation Collection; Release 7.03AL-75224-AAAA

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Optical

Network Design Platform (ONDP) Customer

Documentation Collection; Release 7.0

3AL-75226-AAAA

Related training

Alcatel-Lucent University provides courses to train telecommunication technicians in

installation, operations, and maintenance personnel. Contact Alcatel-Lucent at

1-888-582-3688 to enroll in training classes.

Technical support

For technical support, contact your local customer support team. Reach them via the web

at http://alcatel-lucent.com/support or through the telephone number listed under the

Technical Assistance Center menu at https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do

(https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do).

How to order

To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, contact your local sales representative or use Online

Customer Support (OLCS): (http://support.alcatel-lucent.com).

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

xxi

Quality policy

We ensure that everything we do must be focused on becoming the trusted partner of our

customers by:

• Delivering high quality, secure and reliable products, services, software and solutions

the first time, every time, and on time - as promised.

• Continuously making improvements and looking for innovative ways to anticipate

and fully meet the highest expectations of our customers.

• Counting on all employees to be personally accountable for putting the customer first

and honoring the commitments we make.

This policy will be regularly reviewed, updated as necessary, applied and communicated

to all employees and persons working for or on behalf of Alcatel-Lucent, and made

available to interested parties and the public.

How to comment

To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-

lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline

([email protected]).

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxii 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

1 1Introduction

Overview

Purpose

This chapter describes the features and functionality.

Contents

Features 1-2

Functionality 1-8

The ONDP Interface 1-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

1-1

Features

Overview

ONDP is a software application that operates on a windows-based platform. ONDP is the

Engineering and Planning Tool (EPT) of the 1626LM.

ONDP is used to optimize networks, considering 1626LM product specifications and

optical parameters for the WDM transport layer.

GUI features

The following is a list of the ONDP GUI features.

• A user-friendly GUI provides a network topology view

• Automatic updates of user inputs to keep the overall display interface coherency

• A copy and paste functionality which allows internal or external information to be

moved to or from an Excel spreadsheet.

• An undo/redo functionality

• A smart NE functionality, where the NE type is automatically determined from its

connectivity

• A zoom functionality adjusts the Map scale

• A visualization of the planning tool status informs the user when a new design is

needed

• A display of interactive charts for optical design results

• A graphical gauge displays the optical feasibility of the link

• A display of design results which provides surface based views of network statistics

on graphical objects (nodes and links)

• A graphical highlight of routing results

• A display of wavelength paths in the network

• A Map Generation tool imports, calibrates, and manipulates the Network Map

• A display of failure simulation analysis for restoration design or audit

Network optimization and design features

The following list is a summary of the ONDP network optimization features.

• Provides a rich optimization algorithm for multi-fiber networks which allow finer

WDM line tuning, dispersion mapping optimization, and amplifier settings

optimization. This algorithm uses 1626LM components performance.

• Provides a constraint-based routing & optical transparency optimization algorithm.

Introduction Features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-2 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

• Provides a regeneration and recoloration optimization algorithm for wavelength

allocation. This cost-based algorithm minimizes resource usage and maximizes

transparency as well as fiber filling. The algorithm considers product constraints such

as loading plan and NE architecture.

• Contains a failure simulator for protection assessment and restoration.

• Generates and exports a Network Design Table (NDT). The table, which contains a

full network description (topology and traffic matrix, configuration, and parameter

settings) is exported in .xml format.

• Provides a shelf definition following 1626LM recommendations. Contains a Shelf

Equipment View and Editor for racks, shelves, and boards with the same look and feel

as the network manager.

• Generates Bills of Materials and Part Lists for network quotation. The Bill of

Materials contains a simple and detailed part list, as well as a full equipment

inventory based on Alcatel-Lucent reference numbers for all boards & accessories.

• Provides an enhanced global optimization RWA algorithm that enables the user to

reach pseudo-optimal solutions.

R5.0B features

The following is a list of the major features included in R5.0B.

• Support of designs with 40-G DPSK and PDPSK

• Support of designs with Line Terminal + ILA + B-OADM + R-OADM (WB)

• Support of designs with R-OADM (WSS) nodes up to degree-8

• Support of designs on transmission sections (OTS) with mixed fiber types on the

different spans

• NE Configuration Management - provides the ability to specify the default system

architecture for new projects and to modify NE type inside an existing project.

• Map Generation - provides the ability to generate and calibrate user background

maps.

R6.0 features

The following are the major features included in R6.0.

• Support of multidirectional OADM

• Support of failure analysis

• Support of restoration

• Support of PRC and SBR services

• Support of incremental design

• Support of designs with T-OADM nodes up to degree-8

• Support of mixed NEs with multidirectional and fixed A/D

• Support of 10-G MLSE

Introduction Features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

1-3

• Support of 40-G PDPSK EFEC

• Support of new functionalities for Automatic Line Commissioning through SPLM

• Support of a new Excel file export summarizing the outputs

• Support of migration from ONDP R5.0B to R6.0

R6.0A Features

The following are the major features in R6.0A

• Support of 40-G coherent second-generation services with new Enhanced FEC format

• Support of mixed Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG) and DCF applications — FBG are used

for long spans

• Support of Optical Sub Network Connection Protection (ONSCP) non-revertive

• Support of 40-G P-DPSK pre-filtering design

• Support of long span design with double amplifiers in 2 NEs

• Support of symmetrical double repeater design

• Support of FBG DCM (SMF and E-Leaf) for spans more than 100 km

R6.1 Features

The following are the major features in R6.1:

• ONDP Audit – provides the ability to audit and analyze an existing network. The

analysis is based on user-specified design modes and constraints on resources.

Analysis is performed on full network or selected objects and results are viewed in

ONDP tools and reports.

• ONDP Upgrade – provides the ability to add new resources or modify existing

resources and perform an upgrade design on an existing network, using specified

constraints

• Support of TR2D1191 10-G NRZ transponder

• Support of double LOFA1 (symmetrical or asymmetrical) in all Terminal, X-OADM,

and Repeater configurations

• Support of R-OADM up to degree 8 with WMAN9 and OCNC1280 configurations

• Support of directionless T-OADM up to degree 8 with WMAN9 and OCNC1290

configurations

• Support of multidrectional block based on WMAN9 and TDMX

• Support of Repeater PGE configurations (WMAN1 based)

• Support of Repeater AGE configurations (WMAN9 based) with ALC

• Support of fast restoration configurations

• Support of user choice of Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM) used for spans.

Choices are: Full DCF, Full FBG or Mixed DCF and FBG

Introduction Features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-4 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

R7.0 Features

The following are the major features in R7.0:

• Support of the following 100 G transponder and concentrator boards:

– 112SCA1 - 100Gb/s coherent transponder, NRZ PDM-QPSK modulation format

with EFEC, with CFP module at client side, and embedded ROFA on Tx side;

50GHz grid

– 112SCX10 - coherent 10x10Gb/s concentrator in 100Gb/s, NRZ PDM-QPSK with

EFEC, with XFP at client side and embedded ROFA on Tx side; 50GHz grid.

– 112SX10U - coherent 10x10Gb/s concentrator in 100Gb/s, NRZ PDM-QPSK

with EFEC, with XFP at client side, 1 UDC at 10Mbits and embedded ROFA on

Tx side; 50GHz grid

• Support of the following 40 G transponder and concentrator boards:

– TRBC4616 P-DPSK with new Enhanced FEC (only one TDCM) )

– TRBC4716 NRZ PDM-BPSK with new Enhanced FEC format with XFP on client

side, optional Tx PCDC; 50GHz grid

• Support of 1830PSS PSS32 shelf for 100G transponders

– Support of RSA-ETSI ONERACK with MANGTRU

– Support of 1830PSS Equipment Controller used as Second Level Controller in

1626LM

– Support of FAN32H - high power dissipation unit

• Support of cascade of concentrators, (2.5G->10G->40G): TRBC1191 (client side)

connected to TRBC4_16, (WDM line side). OSNCP protection is supported in this

configuration

• Support of TRBC1191 - 50 GHz: 4 x 2.5G concentrator, NRZ, pluggabe client, no

PCDC

• Support of the following below 2.5G clients mapped into 2.5G or 10G:

– STM16, CBR 2.5G on TRBC1x9z

• Support of the following 40G clients mapped into 40G

– OTU3 on TRBD4xy6 (NNI at 43.0 GBps)

• Support of the following 10G clients mapped into 40G:

– STM64, OC192, 10GbEWAN, and CBR10G on TRBC4xyz boards

– Mix of any 10G format supported on TRBC4x16 boards

– 10GbELAN supported on TRBC4xyz boards (GFP-F mapping)

– OTU2 supported on TRBC4xy6 boards (NNI at 10.7 Gbps)

• Support of the following 10G clients mapped into 100G:

– STM64, OC192, 10GbELAN, CBR10G on 100 G concentrator

– 10 GbELAN on 100G concentrator (bit transparent mapping) Use GMP

Introduction Features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

1-5

– OTU2 on 100G concentrator (NNI at 10.7 Gbps) Use GMP

– OTU2e on 100G concentrator (NNI at 11.1 Gbps) Use GMP

• Support of the following 100G clients mapped into 100G:

– 100GbELAN via GMP on 112SCA1

• OTU4 signal regeneration with 112SCX10 for transmission by 112SCA1 or

112SCX10

OTU4 signal regeneration with 112SC10U for transmission by 112SC10U

• Automatic design with ONDP and GMPLS impacts:

– Mix of two modulation formats: 10G (TRB1191 non-coherent/100Gb coherent

– Mix of two modulation formats: 40G non-coherent (TRB4616) and 100G

coherent

– Mix of two modulation formats: 40G coherent (TRB4617) and 100 G coherent

– Mix of two modulation formats: 100G coherent (112SX10U) and 100G coherent

(112SCA1 or 112SCX10)

– DCM free with LOFA1 and coherent transponders

– 100G coherent in DCU managed network (112SX10U)

– GMPLS - Most disjoint service: ONDP alignment with respect to 1626LM R7.0

GMRE

– GMPLS - Wavelength reuse: ONDP alignment with respect to 1626LM R7.0

GMRE

• Management of ASE (Amplify Spontaneous Emission) noise inducing A/D penalties

with respect to node Optical architecture: Step1:

– For nominal routes, complete OSNR calculation including A/D penalties

– For restoration routes, application of constant penalties

• OSNCP protection based on OCPU board place in1626LM generic shelf and 100 G

coherent board hosted in PSS32 shelf: 112SX10U and 112SCA1

• Alarm for amplifier gain out of range – Amplifier gain minimum and maximum

parameters are provided to detect the variation of the amplifier gain outside of a

planned range.

• End to end service grooming – grooming of services can be done from source to

destination based on the concentrators managed: TRBC4616, TRBC4716, and ETHC.

• Favor or forbid manual definition of regeneration site – during automatic design, the

user can favor a site to receive regeneration, if needed, or forbid a site to receive

regeneration. It is also possible to add a regeneration site.

• Management of number of OMS channels – the user is able to improve performance

by setting different maximum number of OMS channels for subsets

• User name assignment for OMS, OTS, and local OTS.

• Network design including G653 Dispersion Shifted Fibers (DSF)

• ILA site names management – also applies to bypass sites

Introduction Features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-6 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

• Multidirectional Add/Drop block differentiation for services

• Manual modification of shelves by the user after running the design is supported. This

is applicable on all sites except ILA and bypass sites. These modifications are

accepted by ONDP without checks.

• Incremental design step view based on services.

• Encryption of the .ONDP file

• ONDP read-only version

• Network Description Table (NDT) generation for the entire network

• Statistic tool providing the number of NEs and the number of OMSs in a network

Introduction Features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

1-7

Functionality

Network size

The following describes the network design capacity of ONDP.

• 500 NEs

• 1000 Links

• 100 Relations

Design options

ONDP supports the greenfield and brownfield design of based networks. The user can

create and configure a network in a variety of ways.

• Begin the network design from scratch

• Copy and paste external network design information from an Excel spreadsheet

• Load a saved ONDP design file from another user

Both external and initial configurations contain the following network design element

data, which can be edited:

• Site (which contains only one NE in this release)

• Link

• Spans

• Traffic matrix

In engineering and planning the network design, the following options can be configured:

• WDM layer

• Packet layer

• Optimization setting

• Results

Results options

The design results are displayed either graphically, in table format or in a log format.

Introduction Functionality

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-8 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

The ONDP Interface

The ONDP GUI

The ONDP GUI provides a user-friendly interface to enter data and gives easy access to

the full functionality of the tool. The following is an illustration of the ONDP GUI. The

associated windows and tasks are described later in this document.

Figure 1-1 The ONDP GUI

Introduction The ONDP Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

1-9

Introduction The ONDP Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-10 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

2 2Installation and Startup

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides information on how to install, uninstall, launch, and exit the ONDP

application.

Contents

Installation Requirements 2-2

Installer Welcome Window 2-4

InstallShield Wizard Window 2-6

Install ONDP 2-7

Update ONDP Version 2-10

Uninstall ONDP 2-12

Launch ONDP 2-13

Close ONDP 2-14

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

2-1

Installation Requirements

Hardware and software requirements

ONDP is distributed via download. Your Alcatel-Lucent ONDP representative will supply

you with details on how to obtain the software. All required software is included in the

installation. The following hardware and software are required on the PC before you

begin installing the ONDP application.

Table 2-1 Minimum PC Requirements

Processor Pentium IV 2.8 GHz

RAM 1 Gb

Operating System Windows XP

Java Version Version 6 Build 1.6

Check/Update Java Version

To check the Java version installed on your PC follow this path: Start > Settings >

Control Panel > Java > General > About...

To update the Java version installed on your PC, follow this path: Start > Settings >

Control Panel > Java > Update > Update Now

License key

The following are the types of license keys supported by ONDP.

• Client - provides access privileges for most of the system. Expert fields are excluded

from view.

• Bidder - provides access privileges for most of the system.

• Expert - provides access privileges to the entire system

• Read-only - provides viewing privileges, but design and topology changes are not

allowed

To start ONDP successfully, you must install the license key. Use the following process to

obtain a license key and install the license key on your PC.

• Install ONDP on the PC. For more information see the “Install ONDP” (p. 2-7) task.

• Once installed, launch the ONDP application. For more information, see the “Launch

ONDP” (p. 2-13) task.

• The ONDP application supplies a code, which you send to your Alcatel-Lucent ONDP

representative.

• The Alcatel-Lucent ONDP representative returns a License.ondp file, which you copy

into the ONDP folder using this path:

Installation and Startup Installation Requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-2 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

C:/Program Files/<ONDP Installation Directory>/ONDP X.X (where X.X is the

release number).

Using this process, the ONDP application will launch successfully.

Troubleshooting the installation

In order for the ONDP installation to be successful, the folder ONDP_shared_compo-

nents must be installed in the C:/Program Files folder. Users who install the ONDP

application in a folder other than C:/Program Files must create a folder named

C:/Program Files and copy the ONDP_shared_components folder into it. Using a folder

other than C:/Program Files usually applies to users whose PC language is other than

English.

Example:

On a PC for which the language is Italian, the ONDP application is installed in the

C:/Programmi folder. This user must create a folder located under C:/ called Program

Files. The user must then copy the ONDP_shared_components folder from the

C:/Programmi folder into the C:/Program Files folder.

Installation and Startup Installation Requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

2-3

Installer Welcome Window

Installer Welcome window

Upon initial installation of the ONDP software, the Installer Welcome window is

displayed.

The Installer Welcome window has the following options:

• Install - click this option to install the ONDP application. For more information on the

installation process see “Install ONDP” (p. 2-7).

• View - click this option to view the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager Optical

Network Design Platform (ONDP) Installation Guide; Release 7.0

• View User Guide - click this option to view the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager

Optical Network Design Platform (ONDP) User Guide; Release 7.0

Figure 2-1 Installer Welcome window

Installation and Startup Installer Welcome Window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-4 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

• View SRD - click this option to view the Software Release Description (SRD), which

is a summary of the software release features.

• Exit - click this option to exit the installation.

Installation and Startup Installer Welcome Window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

2-5

InstallShield Wizard Window

InstallShield Wizard window

The ONDP InstallShield Wizard window contains the following options to facilitate

ONDP software maintenance.

• Modify - use this option when installing new components of ONDP

• Repair - use this option when updating the ONDP version. For more information, see

“Update ONDP Version” (p. 2-10).

• Remove - use this option when ONDP is uninstalled. For more information, see

“Uninstall ONDP” (p. 2-12).

Figure 2-2 InstallShield Wizard window

Installation and Startup InstallShield Wizard Window

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-6 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Install ONDP

When to use

Use this task to install ONDP on the PC.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Installation Requirements” (p. 2-2)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to install ONDP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Download the iso file. This iso file will be the virtual CD-ROM.

ONDP is distributed via a downloaded iso file. Your Alcatel-Lucent ONDP representative

will supply you with details on how to obtain this file.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do one of the following to start the installer:

• If your PC is configured to run automatically from the CD-ROM drive, the

InstallShield wizard automatically starts.

Result: The Installer Welcome window is displayed. Move to Step 3.

• If your PC is not configured to run automatically, do one of the following:

From the Windows Start

menu, select Start > Run

To display the Installer

Welcome window, browse to

locate and run the setup file:

<CD-ROM

drive>/ONDPInstall.exe

The Installer Welcome

window is displayed. Move

to Step 3.

To skip the Installer

Welcome window, browse to

locate and run the setup file:

<CD-ROM drive>/Setup.exe

The License Agreement

Terms window is displayed.

Move to Step 4.

Installation and Startup Install ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

2-7

From the <ONDP

Installation Directory>/

To display the Installer

Welcome window,

double-click

ONDPInstall.exe

The Installer Welcome

window is displayed. Move

to Step 3.

To skip the Installer

Welcome window,

double-click Setup.exe

The License Agreement

Terms window is displayed.

Move to Step 4.

Note: The Installer Welcome window contains options to view the User Guide or

SRD. For information on the Installer Welcome window, see “Installer Welcome

Window” (p. 2-4).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Installer Welcome window, click the Install option to initiate the installation

process.

Result: The License Agreement Terms window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click the Yes button to accept the terms of the license agreement.

Result: The installation notes are displayed

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Read the installation notes and then click the Next button.

Result: The Installation Directory window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 To specify an installation directory, do one of the following:

• To accept the default directory, click the Next button.

• To use a different directory, enter the directory name or browse to select a directory,

and then click the Next button.

Result: The Start menu configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 To specify a program folder in the Start menu, do one of the following:

• To accept the default folder, click the Next button.

• To use a different directory, enter the directory name or browse to select a directory,

and then click the Next button.

Result: The Installation Summary window displays the products to be installed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click the Next button.

Installation and Startup Install ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-8 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Result: The Installation Summary window displays the installation progress.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 When the installation is complete, click the Finish button.

Result: ONDP is installed.

Installation and Startup Install ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

2-9

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update ONDP Version

When to use

Use this task to update the version of ONDP from the version currently installed on the

PC.

When you load the update version on your PC, an executable file is loaded in this format:

ONDP_X_X_build_nn_installer_dd_mm_yyyy.exe. X_X is the release number, and nn is

the version number within the release.

Before you begin

Before you begin this task, ONDP must be installed on the PC, and you must obtain the

upgrade software and load it on the PC. Upgrades are provided by your Alcatel-Lucent

representative. You will receive instructions on how to load the upgrade.

Note: To verify that the version is updated after completion of this task, view and

compare the current version of ONDP in the Help option on the Main menu.

Task

Complete the following steps to update the ONDP version.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the instructions provided by your Alcatel-Lucent local customer service support

team, to load the ONDP update on your PC.

Result: The update software is loaded.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Browse to the ONDP update executable file ONDP_X_X_build_nn_installer_dd_m-

m_yyyy.exe and run the file.

Result: The ONDP InstallShield Wizard screen is displayed, indicating the installation

progress.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 At the ONDP “InstallShield Wizard Window” (p. 2-6), select Repair and click the Next

button.

Inportant: Always use the Repair option to ensure that the ONDP version is updated

correctly.

Result: The InstallShield Wizard Set up Status is displayed and when the version

update is complete the message Maintenance Complete is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Finish.

Installation and Startup Update ONDP Version

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-10 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Result: The ONDP version update is complete.

Installation and Startup Update ONDP Version

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

2-11

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Uninstall ONDP

When to use

Use this task to uninstall ONDP from the PC.

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to uninstall ONDP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the PC Start menu, select Programs > Alcatel-Lucent > ONDP X.X > Uninstall

ONDP X.X. (where X.X is the release number)

Result: The InstallShield Wizard window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the InstallShield Wizard window, select the Remove option button and then click

the Next button.

Result: The Confirm File Deletion box is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

Result: The uninstall process is started, and a confirmation box is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Finish.

Result: ONDP is uninstalled.

Installation and Startup Uninstall ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-12 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Launch ONDP

When to use

Use this task to launch the ONDP application on the PC.

Before you begin

Before you begin this procedure, ensure that the ONDP application is installed on the PC,

and the ONDP icon appears on the desktop.

Task

Complete the following steps to launch the ONDP application on the PC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:

• Double click the ONDP X.X icon on the PC desktop. (where X.X is the release

number)

• From the PC Start menu, select Programs > Alcatel-Lucent > ONDP X.X >

ONDP.exe. (where X.X is the release number)

Note: Alcatel-Lucent is the default installation folder. If you have created another

folder under which ONDP is installed, use that path to locate the ondp.exe file.

Result: The ONDP main window is displayed.

Installation and Startup Launch ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

2-13

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Close ONDP

When to use

Use this task to close the ONDP application on the PC.

Before you begin

Before you begin this procedure, ensure that the ONDP application is installed on the PC,

and configuration changes are saved prior to closing the application.

Task

Complete the following steps to close the ONDP application on the PC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:

If... Then...

You want to save all configuration changes to

the existing file

Select File > Save. Changes are saved to the

current project

Select File > Exit

You want to save all configuration changes to

a new file

Select File > Save As

A window is displayed where you can name

the file and place it in the desired directory.

You do not want to save any configuration

changes

Select File > Exit

A Warning box is displayed, which warns that

modifications are detected and will be lost.

Click Continue

Result: The ONDP application is closed.

Installation and Startup Close ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-14 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 3ONDP User Interface

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides information about the ONDP user interface.

Contents

Main Menu and Toolbar 3-2

Map Legend 3-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

3-1

Main Menu and Toolbar

Overview

Network design can be accomplished by using the ONDP menus, toolbar, and associated

windows. The following sections describe the Main menu and toolbar.

The Main menu

The Main menu contains the following options:

• File

• Edit

• Display

• Inputs

• Design

• Reports

• Tools

• Misc.

• Help

File menu

Table 3-1 File menu descriptions

File menu command Description

New Project Create a new design project

Open Project Open an existing design project

Save Save the current design to a default file name

Figure 3-1 File menu

ONDP User Interface Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-2 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 3-1 File menu descriptions (continued)

File menu command Description

Save As Save the current design to a designated file name and

location

Encrypt ONDP file on saving Click the checkbox to encrypt the .ondp file while saving.

To deactivate the encryption, uncheck the checkbox while

saving the .ondp file. For more information, see “ONDP

project file encryption” (p. 4-5)

Exit Close ONDP and exit the application

Edit menu

Table 3-2 Edit menu descriptions

Edit menu command Description

Undo Undo the last action performed

Redo Redo the last action that was undone

Delete Selected Remove the selected items

Select All Select all items in the Topology Map

Clear All Clear all previously selected items

Invert Selection Reverse the status of selection of all the items on the map.

Those items in the selected state are cleared and items in

the cleared state are selected.

Figure 3-2 Edit menu

ONDP User Interface Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

3-3

Table 3-2 Edit menu descriptions (continued)

Edit menu command Description

Highlight All Selected Highlight the selected items on the Map.

Insert Step After Current One Stop the current design step and begin the next step in the

incremental design. For more information on Incremental

Design, see “Incremental Design” (p. 4-6).

Delete Current Step Delete all resources added during the current step in the

incremental design. For more information on Incremental

Design, see “Incremental Design” (p. 4-6).

Highlight Current Step Highlight all resources added during the current step in the

incremental design on the Topology map. For more

information on Incremental Design, see “Incremental

Design” (p. 4-6).

Display menu

Table 3-3 Display menu descriptions

Display menu command Description

Display NE Sites Display/hide NE sites on the Topology map

Display xGE Sites Display/hide xGE sites on the Topology map

Display Labels Display/hide labels on the Topology map

Display Links Display/hide links on the Topology map

Figure 3-3 Display menu

ONDP User Interface Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-4 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 3-3 Display menu descriptions (continued)

Display menu command Description

Display Relations Display/hide relations on the Topology map

Display Map Display/hide the background map.

Display Edge Tooltips Display/hide the Edge Tooltip for links and relations on the

Topology Map. For more information, see “Edge Tooltip”

(p. 3-14)

Use Large Icons Display elements on the Topology map using largest size

icons

Use Medium Icons Display elements on the Topology map using the medium

size icons

Use Small Icons Display elements on the Topology map using the smallest

size icons

Inputs menu

Table 3-4 Inputs menu descriptions

Inputs menu command Description

Edit Sites Open the Edit Sites window to edit Site properties. For

more information, see “Section 2: Sites” (p. 4-13)

Edit ILAs Open the Edit ILAs window to edit ILA properties. For

more information, see “Section 3: ILAs” (p. 4-30).

Figure 3-4 Inputs menu

ONDP User Interface Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

3-5

Table 3-4 Inputs menu descriptions (continued)

Inputs menu command Description

Edit Links/Spans Open the Edit Spans window to edit Links and Spans to set

physical link properties. For more information, see “Section

4: Links and Spans” (p. 4-36)

Edit Relations/Services Open the Edit Services window to edit Relations and

Services logical link properties. For more information, see

“Section 5: Relations and Services” (p. 4-56)

Edit Optical Subsets Open the Optical Subsets window to create and edit Optical

Subset properties. For more information, see “Section 6:

Optical Subsets” (p. 4-88)

Edit SRGs Open the Edit SRGs window to edit Shared Risk Groups.

For more information, see “Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)”

(p. 4-99)

Automatic Failure Scope A check in the check box indicates all failure analysis is

done by ONDP based on link and SRG failures only.

Multidirect Add/Drop blocks and Sites are excluded. When

the checkbox is cleared, the Edit Failure Scope command

becomes available for selection, and the failure scope can

be manually defined.

Edit Failure Scope Open the Failures Scope window. This command is

available for selection when the Automatic Failure Scope

command is unchecked. For more information, see

“Failures Scope” (p. 4-105)

Set Design Parameters Open the Design Parameters window to set the network

design configuration parameters. For more information, see

“Section 8: Design Parameters” (p. 4-114)

ONDP User Interface Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-6 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Design menu

Table 3-5 Design menu descriptions

Design menu command Description

Run Full Design [Links + Traffic] Run the full design and produce a network according to the

specified design elements and network design configuration

parameters. This command is the shortcut to run the links

design followed by a traffic design. For more information,

see “The Network Design” (p. 5-2).

Run Full Links Design only Run a partial design to optimize optical parameters such as

amplifier position, dispersion mapping optimization, and

amplifier type settings optimization. For more information,

see “The Network Design” (p. 5-2).

Run Full Traffic Design only Run a partial design to resolve the traffic matrix. Performs a

wavelength allocation, a dimensioning, and a shelf

computation. This operation is only possible if a links

design has been previously triggered. For more

information, see “The Network Design” (p. 5-2).

Figure 3-5 Design menu

ONDP User Interface Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

3-7

Reports menu

Table 3-6 Reports menu descriptions

Reports menu command Description

Show/Tune Selected Links Design Open the Edit route optical design window for selected

links which displays the results of the design. For more

information, see “Show/Tune Selected Links Design ”

(p. 6-3)

Show Selected Links Physical

Diagnostics

Open the Optical design window for the selected links,

which displays the optical design analysis in graphical

format. For more information, see “Show Selected Links

Physical Diagnostics” (p. 6-6)

Show Selected Links Real-Time

Fast Feasibility Criteria

Open a graphical representation of the optical feasibility

of selected links between nodes. For more information,

see “Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility

Criteria” (p. 6-15)

Show Graphical Statistics Open the Statistics window which enables the ability to

show design results for Sites and Links graphically on the

Topology map. For more information, see “Show

Graphical Statistics” (p. 6-17)

Figure 3-6 Reports menu

ONDP User Interface Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-8 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 3-6 Reports menu descriptions (continued)

Reports menu command Description

Show Network Statistics Open the Network Statistics window which displays high

level statistical values of the network design optimization.

For more information, see “Show Network Statistics”

(p. 6-21).

Show Failures Report Open the Failures Report window which shows what

happens to services when a failure on a node/link occurs,

reported as Dead, Restored or not affected. For more

information, see “Show Failures Report” (p. 6-24).

Show GMRE Audit Logs Open the GMRE Audit Logs window which displays the

results of the restoration and protection analysis/failure

analysis. For more information, see “Show GMRE Audit

Logs” (p. 6-31).

Show Traffic Design Logs Open the Traffic design logs window which displays logs

on the network design. For more information, see “Show

Traffic Design Logs” (p. 6-34)

Show Errors Report Open the List Errors window which provides information

about warning messages and errors generated during the

network design. For more information, see “Show Errors

Report” (p. 6-35)

Show Bill of Material Open the Bill of Materials which displays a list of

materials needed to construct the network. For more

information, see “Show Bill of Material” (p. 6-37)

Show Bill of Material (multi-step) Open the Incremental Bill of Material window, which

displays the list of materials needed to construct the

network for each step in the incremental design.

Show Sites/Part List Open the detailed Part List window which displays the

board list with details such as board location and optical

parameters. For more information, see “Show Sites/Part

List” (p. 6-39)

Export Design Results Excel

Report

Open the Excel Export Filtering window to select options

to include in an Excel spreadsheet, and then export the

Excel file of the design results. The report also contains

information about optical design parameters. For more

information, see “Export Design Results Excel Report”

(p. 6-45)

Export BoM Produce output to Comet software for automatic quotation

based on BoM. For more information, see “Export BoM”

(p. 6-71)

ONDP User Interface Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

3-9

Tools menu

Table 3-7 Tools menu descriptions

Tools menu command Description

GMRE Simulator Run the GMRE audit, which produces results of restoration

and protection analysis/failure analysis/dimensioning of the

network.

Misc. menu

Table 3-8 Misc menu descriptions

Misc. menu command Description

Product Database Displays commands related to the product database import

and export functions.

Help menu

The Help menu contains the About option, which displays information about the installed

ONDP software.

Figure 3-7 Misc. menu

Figure 3-8 Misc. menu

Figure 3-9 Help menu

ONDP User Interface Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-10 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

The Toolbar

The ONDP main window toolbar provides tools to create/edit/interrogate the network.

Table 3-9 Toolbar icon descriptions

Tool tip Icon Description

New Project Create a new design

Open Project Open a saved design

Save Save the current design

Save As Save the current design to a designated file name and

location

Undo Undo the last action performed

Figure 3-10 Help window

ONDP User Interface Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

3-11

Table 3-9 Toolbar icon descriptions (continued)

Tool tip Icon Description

Redo Redo the last action that was undone

Delete Selected Remove the selected items

Scale 1:1 Show the network to scale on the Topology Map

Fit to Contents Show the entire network on the Topology Map,

regardless of scale

Select Activate the cursor to select a design element and

deactivate the creation mode

Create Default NE Create an NE at the insertion point with the default

architecture that was specified when creating the

project

Create 3R Create a regeneration site at the insertion point

Create Link Create a link (a sequence of fiber spans) to connect one

site to another. Each link contains at least one fiber

span.

Create Relation Create a relation (which supports a set of service

demands) between two sites. By default, a relation

contains no service.

Run Full Design Run the full analysis on the network design

Show Graphical

Statistics

Open the Graphical Statistics window to display the

results of the network design in graphical format

Optical Margin Tool Display the optical margin available for the set of

selected links

Show Step Slider Display the current step in the Step Slider window.

This window allows the Topology map to display the

resources in the previous or next step in the

Incremental Design. For more information, see

“Incremental Design” (p. 4-6).

ONDP User Interface Main Menu and Toolbar

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-12 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Map Legend

Overview

The Topology map contains icons that represent and facilitate the network design.

Site icons

The following table describes the types of site icons, which contain Network Elements

(NEs). The site icon displays information about the architecture, connectivity, and name

of the NE. For a detailed description on types of sites and NE architecture, see “Section 2:

Sites” (p. 4-13).

Table 3-10 Site icons

Site icon Description

Undefined NE site. A site which contains only one NE.

This NE is not connected to the network.

Terminal site. A site which contains only one NE. This

NE is a fixed NE and is only connected by one link to the

network. This site is opaque.

OADM site. A site which contains only one NE. This NE

is an R-OADM and can have multiple connections to the

network. This site is transparent.

OADM site. A site which contains only one NE. This NE

is a multidirectional NE. The maximum degree of the NE

is 5.

ONDP User Interface Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

3-13

Table 3-10 Site icons (continued)

Site icon Description

3R site. A site which contains only regenerators. This NE

is a fixed NE and is connected by two links to the

network. This site is opaque.

ILA AGE site. A site which contains only one NE. This

NE is connected by two links and is used to correct the

wavelengths tilt. This site is transparent. A user is not

able to create the ILA AGE site. This type of site is

automatically inserted during the links design step.

PGE site when designing APA networks. In this case,

utilize a point to point network with fixed nodes

containing 16 spans.

Edge Tooltip

The Edge tooltip appears by holding the cursor over a link or relation. The information

displayed in the Edge tooltip describes the source and destination of the link/relation. This

information is useful when the entire Topology map is not in view. Additionally, the Edge

tooltip helps distinguish two different fibers with the same source and destination,

indicated as a letter within brackets. This letter is referred to as the Sibling Label. In the

example below, the Sibling Label [A] indicates another fiber exists with the same source

and destination.

Figure 3-11 Edge tooltip

ONDP User Interface Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-14 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Link and Traffic Icons

The following table describes the types of links and traffic icons.

Table 3-11 Traffic Icons

Traffic Icon Description

Link icon. Represents a sequence of fiber spans.

Relations icon. Represents a set of service demands.

Topology Map Pop-up Menu

The Topology Map contains a pop-up menu which has actions that assist in the design. To

access the Topology Map pop-up menu right-click on the Topology Map. Note: ensure

that the cursor is in Select mode, by clicking the Select icon or by clicking the middle

mouse button.

The following table describes the options in the Topology Map pop-up menu.

Table 3-12 Topology Map pop-up menu

Option Description

Create Default NE Create a default NE site at the insertion point

Create Default 3R Create a default regenerator site at the insertion point

Delete All Selected Remove the selected items from the map

Select All Select all design elements on the map

Deselect All Clear all previously selected items.

Figure 3-12 Topology Map Pop menu

ONDP User Interface Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

3-15

Table 3-12 Topology Map pop-up menu (continued)

Option Description

Invert Selection Reverse the status of selection of all the items on the map.

Those items in the selected state are cleared and items in

the cleared state are selected.

Highlight All Selected Highlight the selected items on the map

Site Pop-up Menu

Each site on the Topology Map contains a pop-up menu which has actions to edit the site.

To access the Site pop-up menu right-click on the site icon.

The following table describes the options in the Site pop-up menu.

Table 3-13 Site pop-up menu

Option Description

Edit Site Open the Edit NE window to edit the Label, Type, and

Connectivity of the NE. For more information see, “Edit

NE window” (p. 4-18).

Highlight in Table Open the Edit Sites window with the selected site

highlighted in the table. For more information, see “Site

parameters” (p. 4-20).

Highlight on Map Clears all design elements except the selected site on the

Topology Map.

Create Link Create a link to connect one site to another

Create Relation Create an empty relation

Figure 3-13 Site pop-up menu

ONDP User Interface Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-16 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 3-13 Site pop-up menu (continued)

Option Description

Delete Deletes the selected site from the Topology Map

Show Part List Opens the Part List window which displays the equipment

parameters. For more information, see “Show Sites/Part

List” (p. 6-39).

Show Equipment View Opens the Edit Equipments window which displays a

graphical representation of equipment and allows NE

creation/editing. For more information, see “Show

Equipment View” (p. 6-40) and “Edit Equipments

window” (p. 8-7).

Link Pop-up Menu

Each link on the Topology Map contains a pop-up menu which has actions to view and

edit the link. To access the Link pop-up menu right-click on the link of interest.

The following table describes the options in the Link pop-up menu.

Table 3-14 Link pop-up menu

Option Description

Highlight in Table For a link of interest, opens the Edit Spans window. The

Link is highlighted in the table. For more information, see

“Edit Spans window” (p. 4-37).

Highlight on Map Clears all design elements except the selected link on the

Topology Map.

Figure 3-14 Link pop-up menu

ONDP User Interface Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

3-17

Table 3-14 Link pop-up menu (continued)

Option Description

Delete Deletes the selected Link from the Topology Map

Design Link Run the design process for selected links.

Show/Tune Design Results Opens the Edit route optical design window for selected

links which displays the results of the design. For more

information, see “Show/Tune Selected Links Design ”

(p. 6-3)

Show Physical Diagnostics Opens the Optical design window for the last selected

links, which displays the optical design analysis in

graphical format. For more information, see “Show

Selected Links Physical Diagnostics” (p. 6-6)

Show Real-Time Fast Feasibility

Criteria

Opens a graphical representation of the optical feasibility

of links between nodes. For more information, see “Show

Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria”

(p. 6-15)

Show Line View [full spectrum] The Line View is used as input for a link. It shows the path

followed by all wavelengths supported by the link. The

full spectrum view provides an ordered view of all

possible wavelengths (used or unused) on the link. For

more information, see “Show Line View” (p. 6-41).

Show Line View [optimized] The Line View is used as input for a link. It shows the path

followed by all wavelengths supported by the link. The

optimized view provides a compact unordered view of the

used wavelengths only. For more information, see “Show

Line View” (p. 6-41).

Relation Pop-up Menu

Each relation on the Topology Map contains a pop-up menu which has actions to view

and edit the relation. To access the Relation pop-up menu right-click on the relation.

ONDP User Interface Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-18 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

The following table describes the options in the Relation pop-up menu.

Table 3-15 Relation pop-up menu

Option Description

Highlight in Table For a Relation of interest, opens the Edit Services window.

The selected Relation is highlighted in the table. For more

information, see “Edit Services window” (p. 4-57).

Highlight on Map Clears all design elements except the selected relation on

the Topology Map.

Delete Deletes the selected Relation from the Topology Map

Highlight All Working Path Highlights all working paths on the map.

Highlight All Protecting Path Highlights all protecting paths on the map.

Highlight All Work+Prot Path Highlights all working and protecting paths on the map.

Figure 3-15 Relation pop-up menu

ONDP User Interface Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

3-19

ONDP User Interface Map Legend

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-20 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4 4Design Inputs

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides information on inputs used to design and plan a network.

Contents

Section 1: Starting the Design 4-3

Design Inputs 4-4

Incremental Design 4-6

Create a New Project 4-9

Open an Existing Project (.ondp file) 4-11

Section 2: Sites 4-13

Sites 4-14

Create Sites 4-24

Edit NE Configuration 4-26

Edit Site Parameters 4-28

Delete Sites 4-29

Section 3: ILAs 4-30

ILAs 4-31

Change ILA Site Name 4-34

Section 4: Links and Spans 4-36

Links and Spans 4-37

Create Links and Spans 4-46

Edit Links and Spans 4-47

Add Spans to Links 4-48

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-1

Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span 4-50

Merge Spans 4-52

Delete Links and Spans 4-54

Identify a Link on the Map 4-55

Section 5: Relations and Services 4-56

Relations and Services 4-57

Create a Relation 4-78

Edit Relations and Services 4-79

Create Services 4-80

Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service 4-82

Delete Relations and Services 4-84

Identify a Relation on the Map 4-85

Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints 4-86

Section 6: Optical Subsets 4-88

Optical Subsets 4-89

Create Optical Subset 4-97

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope 4-98

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) 4-99

Failures Scope 4-105

Create an SRG 4-109

Include/Exclude Links/Sites in SRGs 4-110

Delete SRGs 4-111

Edit a Failures Scope 4-112

Section 8: Design Parameters 4-114

Design Parameters 4-115

WDM Layer Design Parameters 4-117

Traffic Setting Design Parameters 4-122

Set Design Parameters 4-125

Design Inputs Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-2 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Section 1: Starting the Design

Overview

Purpose

This section provides information on how to create, view, and edit design projects.

Contents

Design Inputs 4-4

Incremental Design 4-6

Create a New Project 4-9

Open an Existing Project (.ondp file) 4-11

Design Inputs

Section 1: Starting the Design

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-3

Design Inputs

Design inputs

This chapter describes the design elements required for input in the network design. The

following are the types of inputs that are considered in optical network design planning:

• Sites - for more information, see “Section 2: Sites” (p. 4-13).

• ILAs - for more information, see “Section 3: ILAs” (p. 4-30)

• Links and Spans - for more information, see “Section 4: Links and Spans” (p. 4-36).

• Relations and Services - for more information, see “Section 5: Relations and

Services” (p. 4-56).

• Optical Subsets - for more information, see “Section 6: Optical Subsets” (p. 4-88)

• Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope - for more information, see “Section 7:

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope” (p. 4-98)

• Design Parameters - for more information, see “Section 8: Design Parameters”

(p. 4-114).

Starting the ONDP design

After launching ONDP, the Init [ONDP] window is displayed, from which the user

chooses a default NE architecture and a background map to begin a new network design.

Alternatively, the user selects a saved project to open an existing network design. Each

network design that is created and saved is referred to as a project. The file name format

for saved projects is *.ondp. After a project is created, the project default NE

architecture and the background map cannot be changed.

For more information on NE architecture, see “NE architecture” (p. 4-16).

For more information on background map management, see Chapter 9, “Map

Management”.

Design Inputs

Section 1: Starting the Design

Design Inputs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-4 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

ONDP project file encryption

Once a project is created, the *.ondp can be saved as an encrypted file. The option to

save projects in the encrypted format is controlled by clicking the Encrypt ONDP file on

saving checkbox in the File menu. Note: All projects saved while the Encrypt ONDP file

on saving checkbox is checked are saved as encrypted files. All project files saved while

the Encrypt ONDP file on saving checkbox is un-checked are saved as un-encrypted files.

This is also true for projects previously saved as encrypted files.

Figure 4-1 Init [ONDP] window

Figure 4-2 Encrypt ONDP file on saving checkbox

Design Inputs

Section 1: Starting the Design

Design Inputs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-5

Incremental Design

Overview

Incremental design is a feature which provides a method of partitioning the network

design into multiple user-defined steps. The user defines the topology and traffic matrix

information for each step. ONDP then performs the multiple step optimization and

provides map views, design results and BOM information on one specific step, a set of

steps or for all steps.

Design steps

The network design is divided into a series of numbered steps. A new design project, or a

network design that is imported is named Step 0 by default. The user determines the point

in the network design when a new step in the incremental design is necessary. Successive

steps in the design are named Step 1, Step 2, and so on.

Add, delete, and display steps

The Edit menu contains options which are related to Incremental Design and allow the

user to add, delete, and display steps in the incremental design.

Table 4-1 Edit menu Incremental Design descriptions

Edit Incremental Design

menu command

Description

Insert Step After Current One End the current design step and begin the next step in the

incremental design.

Delete Current Step Delete all resources added during the current step in the

incremental design.

Highlight Current Step Highlight all resources added during the current step in the

incremental design on the Topology map.

Figure 4-3 Edit menu Incremental Design options

Design Inputs

Section 1: Starting the Design

Incremental Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-6 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Step Slider window

The Step Slider window displays the resources added in specific steps of the Incremental

Design on the Topology map. To see newly added steps in the Step Slider window, close

and re-open the Step slider window as steps are added to the Incremental Design,

To access the Step Slider window, click the Show Step Slider icon in the Main toolbar.

The center box of the Step Slider window indicates the current step number that is

displayed on the Topology map. Selecting the Prev button displays the resources created

in the previous steps of the incremental design on the Topology map. Likewise, selecting

the Next button displays the resources created in the subsequent step. The sliders can also

be used to move between steps, and indicate by their positions where the current step is in

the total design. For example, if a slider is all the way to the right, the indicated step is the

last step of the incremental design.

The following are the types of information the Step Slider can display on the Topology

map.

• Topology - all resources of the specific step are displayed on the Topology map

• Services - displays services added in the specific step on the Topology map. If the

Services slider is on Step 0, all resources for all steps display on the map as the

Topology slider is moved up or down the step counter. When the Services slider is

moved to subsequent steps, only the relations added in the specific step display on the

map. If the Topology and Services sliders are on the same step other than Step 0, only

those relations added in that step are displayed on the map. If the Topology slider is

moved to a higher step, the cumulative relations added in each step display on the

map by moving the Services slider up or down the step counter.

Example: If the Topology slider is on Step 4, and the Services slider is on Step 1, all

relations added in Step 1,Step 2, and Step 3 display on the map. If the Topology slider

is on Step 4 and the Services slider is on Step 3, only those relations added in Step 3

display on the map.

Figure 4-4 Step Slider window

Design Inputs

Section 1: Starting the Design

Incremental Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-7

Bill of Material (multi-step) report

The Bill of Material (multi-step) report option displays the list of materials needed to

construct the network for each step in the incremental design, for a series of steps in the

incremental design, or for the whole design. For more information on this report, see

“Show Bill of Material (multi-step)” (p. 6-38).

Design Inputs

Section 1: Starting the Design

Incremental Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-8 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Create a New Project

When to use

Use this task to create a network design project. A new project can be created after

launching ONDP, or while working in a current project. New projects are saved with a

.ondp file extension.

Related information

For more information on NE architecture, see “NE architecture” (p. 4-16).

For more information on background maps, see Chapter 9, “Map Management”.

This task has two methods:

• “Task Method 1: Create a New Project From the Launch of ONDP” (p. 4-9)

• “Task Method 2: Create a New Project From the Topology Map” (p. 4-10)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task Method 1: Create a New Project From the Launch of ONDP

Complete the following steps to create a new design project immediately after launching

the ONDP software.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Launch the ONDP software

Result: The Init [ONDP] window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Specify a default NE architecture by selecting an option button. Possible selections are:

Fixed, Reconfigurable, Reconfigurable [DPSK], Tunable, Multidirectional Add/Drop or

Fast Restoration Multidirectional Add/Drop.

Result: NEs added to the design are created by default with the selected NE

architecture.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select a map background from the Choose a default background map list.

Result: The selected background displays on the Topology Map.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click the New Project button.

Design Inputs

Section 1: Starting the Design

Create a New Project

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-9

Result: The Topology Map is displayed with the selected map background, on which

to create a new design project.

Task Method 2: Create a New Project From the Topology Map

Complete the following steps to create a new design project from the Topology Map.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Topology Map, follow this path: File > New Project.

Result: The New Project Options [ONDP] window is displayed. Note: If the last

project was not saved, a warning box is displayed, offering the opportunity to Save or

Continue.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Choose a default architecture field, specify a default architecture by selecting an

option button. Possible selections are: Fixed, Reconfigurable, Reconfigurable [DPSK],

Tunable, Multidirectional Add/Drop or Fast Restoration Multidirectional Add/Drop.

Result: NEs added to the design are created by default with the selected NE

architecture.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select a map background from the Choose a default background map list.

Result: The selected background displays on the Topology Map.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click the Apply button.

Result: The Topology Map is displayed with the selected map background, on which

to create a new design project.

Design Inputs

Section 1: Starting the Design

Create a New Project

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-10 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Open an Existing Project (.ondp file)

When to use

Use this task to open an existing network design project.

Note: When opening an existing project, the default architecture and the background map

cannot be changed.

Related information

For more information on NE architecture, see “NE architecture” (p. 4-16).

For more information on background maps, see Chapter 9, “Map Management”.

This task has two methods:

• “Task Method 1: Open an Existing Project (*.ondp file) From the Launch of ONDP”

(p. 4-11)

• “Task Method 2: Open an Existing Project (*.ondp file) From the Topology Map”

(p. 4-12)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task Method 1: Open an Existing Project (*.ondp file) From the Launch of ONDP

Complete the following steps to open an existing design project immediately after

launching the ONDP software.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Launch the ONDP software

Result: The Init [ONDP] window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the Open Project button.

Result: The ONDP dialog box window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the ONDP dialog box window, navigate to the desired project file and click Open.

Result: The selected project is displayed on the Topology Map.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If the design elements are not visible on the Topology Map, do one of the following.

• From the toolbar, click the Fit to Contents icon.

Design Inputs

Section 1: Starting the Design

Open an Existing Project (.ondp file)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-11

Result: The entire set of design elements are displayed on the Topology Map,

regardless of scale.

• Right click the Topology Map to display the Map menu.

Select Select All

Right click the Topology Map to display the Map menu.

Select Highlight all Selected.

Result: The design elements are displayed on the Topology Map to scale.

Task Method 2: Open an Existing Project (*.ondp file) From the Topology Map

Complete the following steps to open an existing design project from the Topology Map.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Topology Map Main menu, select File > Open Project.

Result: The ONDP dialog box window is displayed. Note:If the last project was not

saved, a warning box is displayed, offering the opportunity to Save or Continue.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the ONDP dialog box window, navigate to the desired project file and click Open.

Result: The selected project is displayed on the Topology Map.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the design elements are not visible on the Topology Map, do one of the following.

• From the toolbar, click the Fit to Contents icon.

Result: The entire set of design elements are displayed on the Topology Map,

regardless of scale.

• Right click the Topology Map to display the Map menu.

Select Select All

Right click the Topology Map to display the Map menu.

Select Highlight all Selected.

Result: The design elements are displayed on the Topology Map to scale.

Design Inputs

Section 1: Starting the Design

Open an Existing Project (.ondp file)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-12 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 2: Sites

Overview

Purpose

This section provides information on how to create, view, and edit sites.

Contents

Sites 4-14

Create Sites 4-24

Edit NE Configuration 4-26

Edit Site Parameters 4-28

Delete Sites 4-29

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-13

Sites

Sites

Setting sites is the first step in designing a network. In this design step, place sites on the

map, define the site configuration, and set the site parameters.

For information on how to perform tasks related to sites, see the following:

• “Create Sites” (p. 4-24)

• “Edit NE Configuration” (p. 4-26)

• “Edit Site Parameters” (p. 4-28)

• “Delete Sites” (p. 4-29)

Types of sites

ONDP provides multiple types of sites on the Topology Map. A site is initially created as

a Default NE. After creating the configuration and physical connections, the site type

changes, and the change is indicated by the various site icons.

The site icon indicates the site type. The information displayed below the site icon is

divided into two sides. The right side displays the site name. The left side indicates the

NE architecture and its connectivity.

The following table describes examples of types of sites and the icons used to signify

them.

Table 4-2 Types of sites

Site icon Description

Undefined NE site. A site which contains only one NE.

This NE is not connected to the network.

Terminal site. A site which contains only one NE. This NE

is a fixed NE and is only connected by one link to the

network. This site is opaque.

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-14 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 4-2 Types of sites (continued)

Site icon Description

OADM site. A site which contains only one NE. This NE is

an R-OADM and can have multiple connections to the

network. This site is transparent.

OADM site. A site which contains only one NE. This NE is

a multidirectional NE. The maximum degree of the NE is

5.

3R site. A site which contains only regenerators. This NE is

a fixed NE and is connected by two links to the network.

This site is opaque.

ILA AGE site. A site which contains only one NE. This NE

is connected by two links and is used to correct the

wavelengths tilt. This site is transparent. A user is not able

to create this site. This type of site is automatically inserted

during the links design step.

PGE site when designing APA networks. In this case,

utilize a point to point network with fixed nodes containing

16 spans.

Default NEs

A default NE is identified by the letter case which is displayed on the left side of the NE

name. If the letter is lower case, then the NE is a default NE. Possible lower case letters

are: f, r, t or m which indicate fixed, reconfigurable, tunable, or multidirectional.

A default NE can have the type modified according to its connectivity. Default NEs

contain an asterisk (*) to indicate the NE degree is automatically computed based on the

connected links.

Based on the connected links, the following default NE types are displayed

• No connected links - Undefined NE type

• One connected link - Terminal NE type

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-15

• More than one connected link - OADM NE type

• Multidirectional link - OADM NE type

Note: A 3R NE type cannot be a default NE.

NE architecture

The default architecture is determined when creating a new project. After creating NEs

(based on default project architecture), the NE type and connectivity can be changed

using the “Edit NE window” (p. 4-18). This configuration information is indicated by the

two characters located below the site icon to the left of the site name.

The NE architecture is indicated by a letter in first position of the site icon label. A lower

case letter indicates the NE is a default NE. If you add or remove links, its type changes

automatically. An upper case letter indicates that the NE type has been selected by the

user. The possible letters and their meanings are:

• f or F - fixed

• r or R - reconfigurable

• t or T - tunable

• m or M - multidirectional

The connectivity is indicated by a digit in the second position of the site icon label. An

asterisk (*) indicates the NE connectivity is automatically computed from the number of

connected links. A numeric value indicates that the connectivity has been fixed by the

user. In this case the number of connected links cannot exceed the selected value but it

can be less to prepare future upgrades.

Examples

• r*

– This site contains a default NE, indicated by the lower case letter. The default

project architecture is r - reconfigurable

– The NE type (terminal, OADM) is deduced from its connectivity.

– The connectivity is automatic, indicated by the asterisk (*). The connectivity is

equal to the number of connected links.

• R*

– This site contains an NE with user-selected architecture, indicated by the upper

case letter. The user has selected R - Reconfigurable.

– The NE type (Reconfigurable OADM WMAN3 or Reconfigurable OADM

WMAN9) has been selected by the user.

– The connectivity is automatic, indicated by the asterisk (*). The connectivity is

equal to the number of connected links.

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-16 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

• R3

– This site contains an NE with user-selected architecture, indicated by the upper

case letter. The user has selected R - Reconfigurable.

– The NE type (Reconfigurable OADM WMAN3 or Reconfigurable OADM

WMAN9) has been selected by the user.

– The connectivity is forced - if two links are already connected, the NE will be able

to be upgraded with one more link in the future.

NE types

The following are the supported NE configuration types:

• Line Terminal

– Fixed Line terminal (50 GHz and 100 GHz)

– Tunable Line Terminal WMAN3 (50 GHz)

• 3R

Note: For the following 3R NEs, the regeneration feature is supported. Add/Drops are

not supported.

– Back to back line terminal

– Tunable back to back line terminal (WMAN3)

• OADM

– B-OADM (50 GHz and 100 GHz)

– B-OADM degree 2

– R-OADM WMAN1 (50 GHz)

– R-OADM WMAN degree 2

– R-OADM degree 2, 3, and 4, based on WMAN3174 and OCNC12x0 (50 GHz)

– R-OADM degree 2 to 7 based on WMAN3174 and OCNC 1280 (50 GHz)

– R-OADM degree 2 to 7 based on WMAN3374 (100 GHz)

– R-OADM degree 2 to 8 based on WMAN9499 and OCNC1280 (50 GHz)

– T-OADM degree 2 to 4 based on WMAN3174 and OCNC12x0 (50 GHz)

(OSNCP)

– T-OADM degree 2 to 7 based on WMAN3174 and OCNC1280 (50 GHz)

(OSNCP)

– Directionless T-OADM degree ≤ 8 based on WMAN3174 (50 GHz)

– directionless T-OADM degree ≤8 based on WMAN9199 (50 GHz)

– Directionless T-OADM degree ≤8 based on WMAN9499 (50 GHz)

• ILA

– Repeater (TT) (auto placement) (degree 2) (not available on network view)

– Programmable Gain Equalizers (PGE) based on WMAN1 without ALC insertion

– Automatic Gain Equalizers (AGE) based on WMAN3174 with ALC insertion

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-17

– AGE based on WMAN3174 with ALC insertion, with OADC0100

– AGE based on WMAN3374 with ALC insertion

– AGE based on WMAN9499 with ALC insertion, with OADC0104

– AGE based on WMAN9499 with ALC insertion, with OADC0100

– Bypass site – automatic placement by ONDP

NE connectivity rules

After creating sites, the NE type and connectivity can be changed using the “Edit NE

window” (p. 4-18). The following are rules for managing NE connectivity.

• If the connectivity is set below the link connection count, links are deleted. If the NE

reverts to the previous architecture, the user can select Undo.

• If an NE type with specific connectivity is selected, the connectivity is also set and

excess links could be automatically deleted.

• Optical rules compatibility are enforced and only NE compatible types are presented.

For example, a fixed terminal is compatible with all NE types. In a Terminal ⇒OADM ⇒ Terminal connection, OADM can be changed to any NE type.

• NE ROADM degree 8 based on WMAN3 does not support relations (add/drop

traffic). Connectivity modification could delete existing relations. If this condition is

not desired, the user is able to select Undo.

NE compatibility rules

The following are rules for NE compatibility. Two compatible NEs can be connected to

each other with an optical link.

• NEs with WMAN3 are compatible with each other

• NEs with WMAN3 or WMAN9 are compatible with each other

• BOADM NEs and NEs with WMAN1 are compatible with each other

• Line terminals (also called fixed terminals) and Back to Back terminals are

compatible with all NE types

• A Back to Back terminal is able to separate two sets of incompatible NEs. For

example: Line terminal ⇒ BOADM ⇒ Back to Back terminal ⇒ TROADM ⇒Tunable Line terminal

Edit NE window

The Edit NE window is used to change the NE configuration. For more information, see

“Edit NE Configuration” (p. 4-26)

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-18 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

The following table describes the options in the Edit NE window.

Table 4-3 Edit NE window

Option Description

Label Change the name of the NE

Type Change the NE type. A change to this field is indicated in

the first character of the site icon label. Only compatible

types are presented. For a list of all NE types see, “NE

types” (p. 4-17). For a list of compatibility rules, see “NE

compatibility rules” (p. 4-18).

Connectivity Change the connectivity of the NE. For connectivity rules,

see “NE connectivity rules” (p. 4-18).

Multidir A/D blocks Change the number of Multidirectional Add/Drop blocks

Unidir A/D allowed Check the checkbox to allow unidirectional add/drop

blocks.

Rename multidir blocks Check the checkbox to allow multidirectional add/drop

blocks (local OTS) name to be user-defined. This field is

operational only for multidirectional NEs.

Multidir blocks names Change the name of the default multidirectional add/drop

blocks (local OTS). Allowed value is any one character

string, except /. /, [. ]. *, ?. This field is operational only

for multidirectional NEs.

Figure 4-5 Edit NE window

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-19

Table 4-3 Edit NE window (continued)

Option Description

Regeneration Select from the Regeneration field menu:

• Auto 3R – (default) ONDP controls the location of

regeneration sites

• Favor 3R – ONDP prioritizes the setting of 3R site on

this node, if regeneration is necessary along a path

going through this node

• Forbid 3R – ONDP will not allow 3R setting on this

node

Site parameters

After configuring the site architecture and connectivity, configure the site parameters.

Edit Sites window

The Edit Sites window is used to configure the site details. To access the Edit Sites

window, do one of the following:

• From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path:

Inputs > Edit Sites

• Right click a site on the Topology Map. From the Site pop up menu, select Highlight

in Table.

• Double click a single site on the Topology Map. Multiple icons can be selected by

holding the Shift key while selecting Sites.

Figure 4-6 Edit Sites window

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-20 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Edit Sites Pop-up Menu

The Edit Sites window contains a pop-up menu that offers additional actions to configure

sites. To access this menu, right click in any field in the Edit Sites window.

The following table describes the options in the Edit Sites window pop-up menu.

Table 4-4 Edit Sites window pop-up menu

Option Description

Undo Undo the last action performed

Redo Redo the last action that was undone

Copy Selected Cells Copy the highlighted cells to the clipboard

Paste Cells Paste the copied cells at the cursor insertion point

Select All Select all sites in the table

Clear All Clear all previously selected sites.

Highlight All Selected on Map Highlight the selected items in the table on the Map

Site parameters

Editable site parameters are indicated by a plus sign (+) appearing before the parameter

title. These parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering the value in

the Edit Sites window. Additional entry methods are indicated in the following table.

Table 4-5 Site parameters

Parameter Definition Default value

Step The step of the

incremental design in

which the site was

created

S0. For more information on incremental

design, see “Incremental Design” (p. 4-6).

Figure 4-7 Edit Sites window pop-up menu

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-21

Table 4-5 Site parameters (continued)

Parameter Definition Default value

+Site Label Name to identify the

site

System generated.

Note: This field can also be changed by double

clicking the Site icon label on the Map. If the

site is an ILA site, it can be changed in the

+Site Label field in the Edit ILA window.

NE Type Identifies the type of

NE

System generated. This label is presented on

the dispersion graph. For more information

see, Figure 6-4, “Dispersion Map window”

(p. 6-9).

+NE Label Name to identify the

NE

System generated. This label is presented on

the Edit Equipment window (Equipment

view).

3R for Restoration

Count [TrxA]

Number of 3R

positioned for

restoration after

dimensioning for

transponder A.

(Transit OEO with or

without recoloring)

System generated. For more information, see

“Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis —

GMRE Simulator” (p. 7-9).

3R for Restoration

Count [TrxB]

Number of 3R

positioned for

restoration after

dimensioning for

transponder B.

(Transit OEO with or

without recoloring)

System generated. For more information, see

“Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis —

GMRE Simulator” (p. 7-9).

+Longitude [X] When placing a site on the map, longitude is

automatically populated based on the site

position.

+Latitude [Y] When placing a site on the map, latitude is

automatically populated based on the site

position.

+Country None

Note: Entering a valid city name as the Site

Label automatically populates the country.

This feature currently supports selected cities

in France and Spain.

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-22 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Edit Sites window buttons

The Edit Sites window contains buttons which perform the following actions.

Table 4-6 Edit Sites window button actions

Button Tool tip Description

Remove selected

sites

Delete the highlighted sites from the network

design.

Remove all sites Delete all sites from the network design.

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-23

Create Sites

When to use

Use this task to create sites.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Sites ” (p. 4-14)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to create a site.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:

• Right click the Map to display the Map pop-up menu and select one of the following

options.

– Create Default NE

– Create Default 3R

• Select one of the following Site icons on the toolbar and click the desired location on

the Topology Map.

Site icon Description

Create Default NE

Create Default 3R

Result: The site is created and the selected site icon appears at the cursor insertion

point on the Map.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 After determining the NE type and connectivity, and editing the site parameters, the site

type icon can change.

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Create Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-24 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

For further information, see

• “Types of sites” (p. 4-14)

• “Edit NE Configuration” (p. 4-26)

• “Edit Site Parameters” (p. 4-28)

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Create Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-25

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit NE Configuration

When to use

Use this task to view or modify the NE configuration, which includes the NE type and

connectivity.

Related information

See the following topics in this document:

• “Sites ” (p. 4-14)

• “NE architecture” (p. 4-16)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task, a site must have been created.

Task

Complete the following steps to view or modify the NE configuration, which includes the

NE type and connectivity.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following to display the Edit NE window

• From the Topology Map, right click a Site icon.

– The “Site Pop-up Menu” (p. 3-16) is displayed.

– From the Site pop-up menu, select Edit Site

• From the Topology Map, double click the NE label.

Result: The “Edit NE window” (p. 4-18) is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Label field, enter the NE name.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Type field, select the NE type from the list. Only the allowable types are displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Connectivity field, select the number of links from the list. Only allowable values

are displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Multidir A/D blocks field, select the number of multidirectional add/drop blocks

from the list. This field is only available for multidirectional NEs.

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Edit NE Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-26 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Check or clear the Undir A/D allowed checkbox, as required by the design.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 To enable or disable rename multidirectional add/drop blocks, do the following:

• Check or clear the Rename multidir blocks checkbox, as required.

• In the Multdir blocks names field, change the multidirectional add/drop names (local

OTS), as required by the user.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 To use the Regeneration field to control the location of regeneration sites, choose one of

the options from the Regeneration field list:

• Auto 3R – (default) ONDP controls the location of regeneration sites

• Favor 3R – ONDP prioritizes the setting of 3R site on this node, if regeneration is

necessary along a path going through this node

• Forbid 3R – ONDP will not allow 3R setting on this node

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click the Apply button.

Result: The NE configuration is modified.

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Edit NE Configuration

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-27

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit Site Parameters

When to use

Use this task to view or modify site parameters.

Related information

See the following topics in this document:

• “Sites ” (p. 4-14)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task, a site must have been created.

Task

Complete the following steps to view or modify site parameters.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:

• From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path:

Inputs > Edit Sites

• Double click a single site on the Topology Map. Multiple icons can be selected by

holding the Shift or the Ctrl key while selecting Sites.

Result: The Edit Sites window is displayed. Sites that are selected on the Topology

Map are highlighted in the table. For an illustration of the Edit Sites window, see

Figure 4-6, “Edit Sites window” (p. 4-20).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Edit the site parameters. For a description of the site parameters, see Table 4-5, “Site

parameters” (p. 4-21).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Close.

Result: The Site parameters are modified.

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Edit Site Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-28 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete Sites

When to use

Use this task to delete sites from the network design.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Sites ” (p. 4-14)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task, a site must have been created.

Task

Complete the following steps to delete sites from the network design.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:

• Follow the steps in the “Edit Site Parameters” (p. 4-28) task to display the Edit Sites

window and select the sites to be deleted. Click the Remove selected sites button or

the Remove all sites button. For more information, see “Edit Sites window buttons”

(p. 4-23).

• From the Topology Map, select the sites to be deleted. Do one of the following:

– Click the Delete Selected icon from the toolbar.

– From the Main menu, follow this path:

Edit > Delete Selected.

– Right click a Site to display the Sites pop-up menu. Click Delete. Note: Only the

Site for which the Site pop-up menu is displayed is deleted.

Result: The selected sites are deleted from the network design.

Design Inputs

Section 2: Sites

Delete Sites

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-29

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 3: ILAs

Overview

Purpose

This section provides information on ILA sites.

Contents

ILAs 4-31

Change ILA Site Name 4-34

Design Inputs

Section 3: ILAs

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-30 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

ILAs

ILAs

The next step in network planning and design is to consider renaming ILA site names.

ILAs are automatically created by ONDP as a result of running the links design. The

following are the types of ILA sites that ONDP creates:

• ILA AGE site – A site which contains only one NE. This NE is connected by two links

and is used to correct the wavelengths tilt. This site is transparent. A user is not able to

create this site. This type of site is automatically inserted during the links design step.

• ILA PGE site – when designing APA networks. In this case, utilize a point to point

network with fixed nodes containing 16 spans.

• ILA – the ILA site is a simple amplifier, which is not visible on the Network Map, but

does appear in the list of ILAs in the Edit ILAs window.

For information on how to perform tasks related to ILAs, see

• “Change ILA Site Name” (p. 4-34) – to change the ILA site name

• “Edit NE Configuration” (p. 4-26) – to change the label of the ILA AGE/PGE site

• “Edit Site Parameters” (p. 4-28) – to change editable ILA AGE/PGE parameters

Edit ILAs window

The Edit ILAs window displays a list of ILA and Bypass sites. When the ILA Label or

NE Label are changed in this window, the modification is reflected the Edit Spans

window. Note: To change the name of an ILA site, use the Edit ILAs window and modify

the specific ILA Label.

To access the Edit ILAs window, follow this menu path: Inputs > Edit ILAs

Figure 4-8 Edit ILAs window

Design Inputs

Section 3: ILAs

ILAs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-31

ILA parameters

Editable ILA parameters are indicated by a plus sign (+) appearing before the parameter

title. These parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering the value in

the Edit ILA window. To change a field, press the Tab key or click in a different field.

Warning: Interaction occurs between the Edit ILAs window, the Spans window and Sites

window, as well as other affected windows and reports throughout the tool. For example,

if the ILA Label is changed in the Spans table of the Edit Spans window, the ILA name

will change in the affected fields in the Spans table, the Edit ILAs window, and all other

windows and reports in which ILA Site Label is contained.

Table 4-7 ILA parameters

Parameter Definition Default value

Steps The step of the

incremental design in

which the link was

created

S0. For more information on incremental

design, see “Incremental Design” (p. 4-6).

+ILA Label Name to identify the

ILA site

System generated.

Note: This field changes what is contained in

the Site Label field on the Spans window and

all other related windows, fields, and reports.

NE Type Identifies the type of

NE

System generated. Possible values are ILA or

Bypass. This label is presented on the

dispersion graph. For more information see,

Figure 6-4, “Dispersion Map window”

(p. 6-9).

+NE Label Name to identify the

NE

System generated. User is able to edit this field

as required.

+Country None

Note: Entering a valid city name as the Site

Label automatically populates the country.

This feature currently supports selected cities

in France and Spain.

Edit ILAs Pop-up Menu

The Edit ILAs window contains a pop-up menu that offers additional actions to configure

ILAs. To access this menu, right click in any field in the Edit ILAs window.

Design Inputs

Section 3: ILAs

ILAs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-32 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

The following table describes the options in the Edit ILAs window pop-up menu.

Table 4-8 Edit ILAs window pop-up menu

Option Description

Undo Undo the last action performed

Redo Redo the last action that was undone

Copy Selected Cells Copy the highlighted cells to the clipboard

Paste Cells Paste the copied cells at the cursor insertion point

Select All Select all sites in the table

Deselect All Clear all previously selected sites.

Figure 4-9 Edit ILAs window pop-up menu

Design Inputs

Section 3: ILAs

ILAs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-33

Change ILA Site Name

When to use

Use this task to change the name that ONDP has assigned to an ILA site to a user-defined

site name.

This task is divided into 2 methods:

• “Method 1: Change ILA Site Name for ILA_AGE/ILA_PGE Sites” (p. 4-34)

• “Method 2: Change ILA Site Name for ILA/Bypass Sites” (p. 4-35)

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “ILAs” (p. 4-31)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task, the ILA site must have been created by ONDP.

Method 1: Change ILA Site Name for ILA_AGE/ILA_PGE Sites

Complete the following steps to change ILA site name for ILA_AGE/ILA_PGE sites.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:

• From the “Edit Sites window” (p. 4-20), double click on the Site Label field for the

desired ILA_AGE/ILA_PGE, and enter the new ILA name.

• From the “Edit NE window” (p. 4-18), change the name of the ILA_AGE/ILA_PGE

in the Label field.

Result: The selected ILA_AGE/ILA_PGE site names are changed in all related

ONDP fields and reports.

Design Inputs

Section 3: ILAs

Change ILA Site Name

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-34 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Method 2: Change ILA Site Name for ILA/Bypass Sites

Complete the following steps to the change ILA site name for ILA/Bypass sites.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:

• From the “Edit ILAs window” (p. 4-31), double click on the ILA Label field and enter

the new ILA/Bypass site name.

• From the “Edit Spans window” (p. 4-37) window, double click in either the NE name

before span field, or the NE name after span field and enter the new ILA/Bypass

site name.

Result: The selected ILA/Bypass site names are changed in all related ONDP fields

and reports.

Design Inputs

Section 3: ILAs

Change ILA Site Name

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-35

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 4: Links and Spans

Overview

Purpose

This section provides information on how to create, view, and edit links and spans.

Contents

Links and Spans 4-37

Create Links and Spans 4-46

Edit Links and Spans 4-47

Add Spans to Links 4-48

Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span 4-50

Merge Spans 4-52

Delete Links and Spans 4-54

Identify a Link on the Map 4-55

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-36 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Links and Spans

Links and Spans

The next step in network planning and design is to consider the links between the sites.

For information on how to perform tasks related to links and spans, see the following:

• “Create Links and Spans” (p. 4-46)

• “Edit Links and Spans” (p. 4-47)

• “Add Spans to Links” (p. 4-48)

• “Delete Links and Spans” (p. 4-54)

• “Identify a Link on the Map” (p. 4-55)

Edit Spans window

The Edit Spans window is used to configure link details and the span details associated

with the links. The window is divided into two sections: Links and Spans. When a link is

selected from the Links section, the spans associated with the link are displayed in the

Spans section. Interaction occurs between the Links table and the Spans table. Changing a

parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the Spans

Count is changed in the Links table, the spans for the link are redefined in the Spans

table.

Figure 4-10 Edit Spans window

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-37

Links Pop-up Menu

The Edit Spans window contains two pop-up menus that offer additional actions to

configure links and spans parameters: the Links pop-up menu and the Spans pop-up

menu. To access the Links pop-up menu, right click any field in the Links table.

The following table describes the options in the Links table pop-up menu.

Table 4-9 Links table pop-up menu

Option Description

Undo Undo the last action

Redo Redo the last action

Copy Selected Cells Copy selected cells to the clip board

Paste Cells Paste the copied cells at the cursor insertion point

Select All Select all links on the map

Deselect All Clear all previously selected links.

Highlight All Selected on Map Highlight the links that are selected on the Map in the

Links table

Design Selected Links Run the design process for selected links.

Show/Tune Design Results Opens the Edit route optical design window which displays

the results of the design and allows the design to be

changed. For more information, see “Show/Tune Selected

Links Design ” (p. 6-3).

Figure 4-11 Links table pop-up menu

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-38 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 4-9 Links table pop-up menu (continued)

Option Description

Show Physical Diagnostics Opens a window which allows you to toggle between the

Dispersion Map and Optical design results for a design. For

more information, see “Show Selected Links Physical

Diagnostics” (p. 6-6).

Show Real-Time Fast Feasibility

Criteria

Opens the FFC window. If the optical inputs change, the

Fast Feasibility Criteria (FFC) value displays the optical

feasibility of links between nodes and is recalculated. For

more information, see “Show Selected Links Real-Time

Fast Feasibility Criteria” (p. 6-15).

Links parameters

Editable link parameters are indicated by a plus sign (+) appearing before the parameter

title. These parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering the value in

the Edit Spans window. To change a field, press the Tab key or click in a different field.

Additional entry methods are indicated in the following tables.

Warning: Interaction occurs between the Links table and the Spans table. Changing a

parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the Spans

Count is changed in the Links table, the spans for the link are redefined in the Spans

table.

Table 4-10 Links parameters

Parameter Definition Default value

Steps The step of the

incremental design in

which the link was

created

S0. For more information on incremental

design, see “Incremental Design” (p. 4-6).

Source Site Identifies the

origination site of the

link

(varies)

Destination Site Identifies the end site

of the link

(varies)

Sibling Label Differentiates two

links from the same

source to the same

destination

Empty, A, B, C, D, ...

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-39

Table 4-10 Links parameters (continued)

Parameter Definition Default value

+Link name Name for the OMS Default value: [Source Site name] [Destination

Site name] [Sibling Label if not empty].

Editable field. Any string of characters

allowed except strings containing /. /, [. ]. *, ?.

+Fiber Type Identifies the type of

fiber

Possible values are: SMF (default), E-leaf,

TWRS, and DSF. Mixed fiber type is

automatically generated; it is not an entry

available to the user. For more information,

see “Mixed fiber type with DSF” (p. 4-41).

+Subset Identifies the name of

the subset to which

this link belongs

Select the subset from the pull down list, or

accept the default. For more information on

subsets, see “Section 6: Optical Subsets”

(p. 4-88).

+Spans Count Sets the number of

spans in the link

1

+Length [km] Sets the length in

[km] of the link.

Represents the total

length of all the spans

in the link.

100. This field is interactive with the Length

fields in the Spans table. Changing the value

in this parameter changes the value in the

Length parameter in the Spans table. Adding

spans to the link increases the value of this

field. For more information, see “Mixed fiber

type with DSF” (p. 4-41).

+Lineic Loss

[dB/km]

Ratio between the

loss and the length

+Loss [dB] Sets the loss in dB of

the span

22

Sets the loss of the link. Represents the total

losses of all the spans in the link.

+BOL/EOL Loss

Margin

Beginning of

Life/End of Life loss

margin.

1

PMD [ps] Polarization Mode

Dispersion

1. This field is the result of the calculation

coming from the spans. Each span brings a

PMDi per span equal to the square root of

Length * PMDi coefficient. The total PMD is

calculated by: PMD 2=Sum for each span

PMDi 2 per span. In this example, only one

span exists, therefore the square root of 100 =

10 multiplied by 0.1 leads to 1 ps.

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-40 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 4-10 Links parameters (continued)

Parameter Definition Default value

+Administrative Cost User-defined entry

which assigns a cost

to the routing. A

lower cost gives

preference to the

path. This field is

used for RWA

optimization.

1

+Computation Mode Used to define how

the audit process is

controlled on this

resource. Possible

values are:

Automatic,

Semi-Auto, Manual,

or NLP/OSNR

Automatic

For more information, see “Set Computation

Mode parameter” (p. 7-4)

Mixed fiber type with DSF

If an OMS contains mixed fibers types with at least one DSF, there is a restriction on the

length of the other fiber type. The following table lists the maximum length (km)

authorized for the other fiber type, to prevent exceeding the dispersion limit.

Table 4-11 Mixed fiber types with DSF length restriction

SMF E-LEAF TW-RS TeraLight

10G NRZ 33 94 102 62

40G P-PDSK 54 156 170 103

Links table buttons

The Links table in the Edit Spans window contains buttons which perform the following

actions.

Table 4-12 Links table button actions

Button Tool tip Description

Remove selected link Delete the highlighted links from the

network design.

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-41

Table 4-12 Links table button actions (continued)

Button Tool tip Description

Remove all links Delete all links from the network design.

Spans Pop-up Menu

The Edit Spans window contains two pop-up menus that offer additional actions to

configure links and spans parameters: the Links pop-up menu and the Spans pop-up

menu. To access the Spans pop-up menu, right click any field in the Spans table.

The following table describes the options in the Spans pop-up menu.

Table 4-13 Spans table pop-up menu

Option Description

Undo Undo the last action

Redo Redo the last action

Copy Selected Cells Copy selected cells to the clip board

Paste Cells Paste the copied cells at the cursor insertion point

Select All Select all links on the map

Deselect All Clear all previously selected links.

Figure 4-12 Spans table pop-up menu

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-42 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 4-13 Spans table pop-up menu (continued)

Option Description

Copy Span to Add Model Copies all of the parameters of the selected span to the Add

Span tool tip. The parameters are displayed on the Add

Span tool tip. To add a span with the copied parameters,

click the Add Span button. For more information, see

“Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span”

(p. 4-50).

Copy Cell to Add Model Copies the parameters of the selected cell to the Add Span

tool tip. The copied parameters are displayed on the Add

Span tool tip. To add a span with the copied parameters,

click the Add Span button. For more information, see

“Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span”

(p. 4-50).

Merge Selected Spans Merges a set of selected contiguous spans. The result is a

single span with the characteristics of the selected spans.

For more information, see “Merge Spans” (p. 4-52).

Spans parameters

Editable span parameters are indicated by a plus sign (+) before the parameter title. These

parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering the value in the Edit

Spans window. To see a change in a field, press the Tab key or click in a different field.

Additional entry methods are indicated in the following tables.

Warning: Interaction occurs between the Links table and the Spans table. Changing a

parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the Spans

Count is changed in the Links table, the spans for the link are redefined in the Spans

table.

Table 4-14 Span parameters

Parameter Definition Default value

Steps The step of the

incremental design in

which the span was

created.

S0. For more information on incremental

design, see “Incremental Design” (p. 4-6).

+Order Order in which the

span displays in the

table

(varies)

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-43

Table 4-14 Span parameters (continued)

Parameter Definition Default value

+NE name before

span

Site, ILA, or Bypass

before the span in the

considered direction

Editable field. Any string of characters

allowed except strings containing /. /, [. ]. *, ?.

Default value is the name of the Site, ILA, or

Bypass that is located at the beginning of the

span.

+NE name after span Site, ILA, or Bypass

after the span in the

considered direction

Editable field. Any string of characters

allowed except strings containing /. /, [. ]. *, ?.

Default value is the name of the Site, ILA, or

Bypass that is located at the end of the span.

+Span name Name for the OTS Default value: [Source name] [Destination

name]. Editable field. Any string of characters

allowed.

Default value definitions:

• Source name – site or ILA before the span

in the considered direction

• Destination name – site or ILA after the

span in the considered direction

+Fiber Type Identifies the type of

fiber

Possible values are: SMF (default), E-leaf,

TWRS, and DSF

+Length [km] Sets the length in

[km] of the span.

This field is interactive with the Length and

Spans Count fields in the Links table. The

value in this field is the length of the link

divided by the number of spans. Changing the

value in this parameter changes the value in

the Length parameter in the Links table.

+BOL Lineic Loss

[dB/km]

Ratio between the

loss and the length

0.22. This field changes when the Length field

is changed.

+ BOL Loss [dB] Sets the Beginning of

Life loss in dB of the

span

22

PMD Coefficient

[ps/sqrt(km)]

Polarization - Mode

Dispersion

0.1

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-44 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Spans table buttons

The Spans table in the Edit Spans window contains buttons which perform the following

actions.

Table 4-15 Spans table button actions

Button Tool tip Description

Add a span with the specified parameters to

the link. The tool tip displays the parameters

of the span that is added.

For more information on how to change the

parameter information before adding the

span, see “Change Span Parameters and Copy

to a New Span” (p. 4-50)

Remove selected

spans

Delete the highlighted spans from the link.

Remove all spans

but one

Delete all spans but one from the link.

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-45

Create Links and Spans

When to use

Use this task to create a link. When a link is created between two sites, a span is also

automatically created.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Links and Spans” (p. 4-37)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to create a link.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:

• Select the Create Link icon on the Topology Map toolbar.

• Right click the site to display the Site pop-up menu. From the Site pop-up menu,

select Create Link.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 On the Topology Map, click the Site from which the link originates and drag the cursor to

the site on which the link terminates.

Result: A blue line representing a link is created between the sites. A single span for

the link is automatically created.

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Create Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-46 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit Links and Spans

When to use

Links and spans are viewable and editable from the Edit Spans window. Use this task to

view and edit links and spans.

Warning: Interaction occurs between the Links table and the Spans table. Changing a

parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the Spans

Count is changed in the Links table, the spans for the link are redefined in the Spans

table.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Links and Spans” (p. 4-37)

Before you begin

To complete this task, a link must be created.

Task

Complete the following steps to view and edit links and spans.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Display the Edit Spans window by doing one of the following:

• From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path:

Inputs > Edit Links/Spans

• Right click a link on the Topology Map. From the Link pop-up menu, select Highlight

in Table.

Result: The Edit Spans window is displayed. Links that are selected on the Topology

Map are highlighted in the table. For an illustration of the Edit Spans window, see

Figure 4-10, “Edit Spans window” (p. 4-37).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Edit the link/span parameters. For a description of the link parameters, see Table 4-10,

“Links parameters” (p. 4-39). For a description of the span parameters, see Table 4-14,

“Span parameters” (p. 4-43).

Result: The links and spans are changed.

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Edit Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-47

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Add Spans to Links

When to use

Use this task to add spans to links.

Warning: Interaction occurs between the Links table and the Spans table. Changing a

parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the Spans

Count is changed in the Links table, the spans for the link are redefined in the Spans

table.

Note: When spans are added to a link, ONDP automatically creates ILA or Bypass sites

between the spans. Once created, ILA or Bypass sites are displayed in the Edit ILAs

window. For more information, see “Edit ILAs window” (p. 4-31).

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Links and Spans” (p. 4-37)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to add spans to links.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the first step in the “Edit Links and Spans” (p. 4-47) to display the Edit Spans

window.

Result: The Edit Spans window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the link to which spans will be added.

Result: The link is selected and the spans in the link are displayed in the Spans table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do one of the following to add spans to the selected link.

• In the Links table, click in the Spans Count field and enter the number of spans.

• In the Spans table, mouse over the Add Span button on the left side of the table. If the

Span parameters are correct, click the Add Span button.

Note: The Add Span button tool tip displays the parameters of the Span that will be

added. To change the parameters of a span and copy them to a new span, see “Change

Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span” (p. 4-50).

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Add Spans to Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-48 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Result: Spans are added to the link and the associated parameters are redefined in the

tables.

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Add Spans to Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-49

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span

When to use

Use this task to Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span.

Warning: Interaction occurs between the Links table and the Spans table. Changing a

parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the Spans

Count is changed in the Links table, the spans for the link are redefined in the Spans

table.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Links and Spans” (p. 4-37)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span

Complete the following steps to change the span information displayed in the Add Span

button tool tip and copy to a new span.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the first step in the “Edit Links and Spans” (p. 4-47) to display the Edit Spans

window.

Result: The Edit Spans window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the link to which spans will be added.

Result: The link is selected and the spans in the link are displayed in the Spans table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Spans table, select the Span to copy.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Do one of the following:

• To copy all the span parameters to the Add Span button tool tip, right click in the table

to display the Spans table pop-up menu, and select Copy Span to Add Model.

• To change a parameter in the span, edit the span parameter, right click in the table to

display the Spans table pop-up menu, and select Copy Cell to Add Model.

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-50 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Result: The Span parameter information is changed in the Add Span button tool tip.

To view the change applied to the Add Model, mouse over the Add Span button for at

least one second.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click the Add Span button.

Result: The new span is added to the table below the selected row.

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-51

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Merge Spans

When to use

Use this task to merge spans.

Warning: Interaction occurs between the Links table and the Spans table. Changing a

parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the Spans

Count is changed in the Links table, the spans for the link are redefined in the Spans

table.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Links and Spans” (p. 4-37)

Before you begin

To merge spans, the spans must be compatible. Merged spans must have the same type

(SMF, LEAF, TWRS, or DSF).

Task

Complete the following steps to add merge spans.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the first step in the “Edit Links and Spans” (p. 4-47) to display the Edit Spans

window.

Result: The Edit Spans window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the link on which spans will be merged.

Result: The link is selected and the spans in the link are displayed in the Spans table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the spans to merge. To select multiple spans, hold the Shift key while selecting

spans. Note: Spans must be contiguous.

Result: Selected spans are highlighted in the table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Right click the Spans table to display the Spans table pop-up menu.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Spans table pop-up menu, select Merge Selected Cells.

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Merge Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-52 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Result: The selected spans are merged into a single span containing the characteristics

from the merged cells.

Note: Once spans are merged, some ILA or Bypass sites between them are deleted.

This can be seen in the Edit ILAs window. For more information, see “Edit ILAs

window” (p. 4-31).

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Merge Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-53

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete Links and Spans

When to use

Use this task to delete links and spans from the network design.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Links and Spans” (p. 4-37)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to delete links or spans from the network design.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:

• Follow the first step in the “Edit Links and Spans” (p. 4-47) task to display the Edit

Spans window and select the links or spans to be deleted. Do one of the following:

– Click the Remove selected links or the Remove selected spans button.

– From the Links table, select the Remove all links button.

– From the Spans table, select the Remove all spans but one button.

• From the Topology Map, select the links to be deleted. Do one of the following:

– Click the Delete Selected icon from the toolbar.

– From the Main menu, follow this path:

Edit > Delete Selected.

– Right click the Map and select Delete All Selected from the Map pop-up menu.

Result: The links and spans are deleted.

Note: If a link is deleted, all ILAs and Bypass sites on the link are deleted. If a

span is deleted, the corresponding ILA or Bypass sites are deleted.

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Delete Links and Spans

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-54 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Identify a Link on the Map

When to use

Use this task to identify a link on the Map.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Links and Spans” (p. 4-37)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task, a link must be created.

Task

Complete the following steps to identify links on the Map.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the first step in the “Edit Links and Spans” (p. 4-47) task to display the Edit Spans

window.

Result: The Edit Spans window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select a link by clicking the link row. Multiple links can be selected by holding the [Shift]

key while selecting links.

Result: The links are selected.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right click in the Edit Spans window.

Result: The Links pop-up window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Links pop-up window, select Highlight All Selected on Map.

Result: The selected links are highlighted on the Topology Map.

Design Inputs

Section 4: Links and Spans

Identify a Link on the Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-55

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 5: Relations and Services

Overview

Purpose

This section provides information on how to create, view, and edit relations and services.

Contents

Relations and Services 4-57

Create a Relation 4-78

Edit Relations and Services 4-79

Create Services 4-80

Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service 4-82

Delete Relations and Services 4-84

Identify a Relation on the Map 4-85

Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints 4-86

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-56 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Relations and Services

Relations and Services

The next step in network planning and design is to consider the traffic matrix. In ONDP,

this step is accomplished through relations and services.

For information on how to perform tasks related to relations and services, see the

following:

• “Create a Relation” (p. 4-78)

• “Edit Relations and Services” (p. 4-79)

• “Create Services” (p. 4-80)

• “Delete Relations and Services” (p. 4-84)

• “Identify a Relation on the Map” (p. 4-85)

• “Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints” (p. 4-86)

Routing constraints

The use of spectral and spacial routing constraints enables the user to impact the Routing

and Wavelength Allocation (RWA) of services. It is possible to specify both the path

(spatial constraint) and the wavelength (spectral constraint). For more information, see

“Edit Spectral Constraint window” (p. 4-74) and “Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints”

(p. 4-86)

Most Disjoint feature

The Most disjoint feature is designed to release design constraints if no other solution is

available . This feature allows, under some conditions, infringement of disjointness rules.

To activate this feature, check the Most disjoint on links/nodes checkbox located on the

“Traffic Setting Design Parameters” (p. 4-122).

Edit Services window

The Edit Services window is used to configure relations details and the services details

associated with the relations. The window is divided into two sections: Relations and

Services. When a relation is selected from the Relations section, the services associated

with the relation are displayed in the Services section. Interaction occurs between the

Relations table and the Services table. Changing a parameter in one table can affect the

parameters in the other. For example, if the Services Count is changed in the Relations

table, the services for the relation is redefined in the Services table.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-57

Relations Pop-up Menu

The Edit Services window contains two pop-up menus that offer additional actions to

configure relations and services parameters: the Relations table pop-up menu and the

Services table pop-up menu. To access the Relations table pop-up menu, right click any

field in the Relations table.

Figure 4-13 Edit Services window

Figure 4-14 Relations table pop-up menu

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-58 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

The following table describes the options in the Relations table pop-up menu.

Table 4-16 Relations table pop-up menu

Option Description

Undo Undo the last action

Redo Redo the last action

Copy Selected Cells Copy selected cells to the clip board

Paste Cells Paste the copied cells at the cursor insertion point

Select All Select all relations in the table

Deselect All Clear all previously selected relations.

Topo Highlight... Opens the Topo Highlight menu, which contains

commands to highlight relations on the Topology Map. For

more information, see Figure 4-15, “Topo Highlight... pop

up menu” (p. 4-60).

Freeze all Constraints [W+P] Prevents the RWA of all working and protecting paths from

changing

Freeze all Constraints [W+P]

Except Unprotected

Prevents the RWA of all working and protecting paths from

changing, except for unprotected paths.

Clear all [W] Constraints Clear the RWA for all working paths

Clear all [P] Constraints Clear the RWA for all protecting paths

Working [W] Constraints Opens the Working Constraints pop up menu, which

contains commands to create or edit the RWA for working

paths. For more information, see Figure 4-16, “Working

[W] Constraints pop up menu” (p. 4-60).

Protecting [P] Constraints Opens the Protecting Constraints pop up menu, which

contains commands to create or edit the RWA for

protecting paths. For more information, see Figure 4-17,

“Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu” (p. 4-61)

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-59

The Topo Highlight... menu contains commands to highlight relations on the Topology

Map. To access this menu, right click in the Relations table, and from the Relations table

pop up menu, move the cursor to the Topo Highlight... command.

Option Description

Highlight All Selected on Map Highlight the relations that are selected in the

table on the Topology Map

Highlight All [W] Paths Highlights all working paths on the Map.

Highlight all [P] Paths Highlights all protecting paths on the Map.

Highlight all [W+P] Paths Highlights both working and protecting paths

on the Map.

The Working [W] Constraints pop up menu contains commands to create or edit

constraints on relations. To access this menu, right click in the Relations table, and from

the Relations table pop up menu, move the cursor to the Working [W] Constraints

command.

Table 4-17 Working [W] Constraints pop up menu

Option Description

Highlight [W] Path Constraints Highlight working path constraints on the

Topology Map

Figure 4-15 Topo Highlight... pop up menu

Figure 4-16 Working [W] Constraints pop up menu

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-60 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 4-17 Working [W] Constraints pop up menu (continued)

Option Description

Freeze [W] Computed Path (Spatial Only) Prevent the computed spatial working path

from changing.

Freeze [W] Computed Path (Spatial +

Spectral)

Prevent the computed spatial and spectral

working path from changing.

Set [W] Path Constraints from Map Selection Set working path constraints selected on the

Topology Map

Clear [W] Constraints Clear all working path constraints.

The Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu contains commands to create or edit

protecting constraints on relations. To access this menu, right click in the Relations table,

and from the Relations table pop up menu, move the cursor to the Protecting [W]

Constraints command.

Table 4-18 Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu

Option Description

Highlight [P] Path Constraints Highlight protecting path constraints for

relations on the Topology Map

Freeze [P] Computed Path (Spatial Only) Prevent the computed spatial protecting path

from changing.

Freeze [P] Computed Path (Spatial + Spectral) Prevent the computed spatial and spectral

protecting path from changing.

Set [P] Path Constraints from Map Selection Set protecting path constraints for relations

selected on the Topology Map

Clear [P] Constraints Clear all protecting path constraints for

relations.

Figure 4-17 Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-61

Relations parameters

Editable relations parameters are indicated by a plus sign (+) before the parameter title.

These parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering the value in the

field. After changing the field value, press the Tab key or click in a different field.

Additional entry methods are indicated in the following tables.

Table 4-19 Relations parameters

Parameter Definition Default value

Steps The step of the

incremental design in

which the relation

was created.

S0. For more information on incremental

design, see “Incremental Design” (p. 4-6).

Source Site Identifies the

origination site of the

relation

(varies)

Destination Site Identifies the end site

of the relation

(varies)

Sibling Label Differentiates two

links from the same

source to the same

destination

Empty, A or B

+Client Traffic Sets the client side

board for the relation

Allowable values are defined in the

Transponder Bitrate and Encoding fields on

the Set Design Parameters window,

corresponding to the line side. The default is

defined by the value set in the TrxA field.

To change the Client Traffic field double click

the field and select from the list. For more

information, see “Setting Client Traffic,

Concentration, and OCH Line fields”

(p. 4-63).

+Concentration Sets the type of

concentration for the

relation

None.

Allowable values are determined by the Client

Traffic and Transponder Bitrate and

Encoding fields. Only allowable values are

displayed.

To change the Concentration field double

click the field and select from the list. For

more information, see “Setting Client Traffic,

Concentration, and OCH Line fields”

(p. 4-63).

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-62 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 4-19 Relations parameters (continued)

Parameter Definition Default value

+OCH Line Sets the OCH line

type of this relation

Allowable values are determined by the values

set in the Client Traffic, Transponder Bitrate

and Encoding, and Concentration fields.

To change the OCH Line field double click the

field and select from the list. For more

information, see “Setting Client Traffic,

Concentration, and OCH Line fields”

(p. 4-63).

+Protection Type Sets the protection of

the relation

Unprotected

Select the Protection Type from the list by

double clicking in the field. Changing this

field changes the Protection Type of all the

service in the relation. Possible values are:

Unprotected, Protection 1 + 1, Restoration

SBR or Restoration PRC.

+Disjointness Sets disjoint

condition for diverse

path routing

Varies, based on the value selected in the

Protection Type field. Affects the routing of

unprotected and SBR services. Services can

have the same sources and destinations or

different sources and destinations.

+Services Count Sets the number of

services in the

relation

1

Capacity [Mb/s] Identifies the capacity

in [Mb/s] of the

relation. Represents

the total capacity of

all the services in the

relation.

Varies, based on the values in the Service

Type and Service Count fields.

Setting Client Traffic, Concentration, and OCH Line fields

The values in the Client Traffic, Concentration, and OCH Line fields interact with each

other and also interact with the services in the relation. Based on the changes made, the

values in the Client Traffic, Concentration, and OCH Line fields may change, and the

possible options available for selection in these fields may change, in both the Relations

table and the Services table.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-63

Relations table buttons

The Relations table in the Edit Services window contains buttons which perform the

following actions.

Table 4-20 Relations table button actions

Button Tool tip Description

Remove selected

relations

Delete the highlighted relations from the

network design.

Remove all relations Delete all relations from the network design.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-64 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Services Pop-up Menu

The Edit Services window contains two pop-up menus that offer additional actions to

configure relations and services parameters: the Relations pop-up menu and the Services

pop-up menu. To access the Services pop-up menu, right click any field in the Services

table.

The following table describes the options in the Services table pop-up menu.

Table 4-21 Services table pop-up menu

Option Description

Undo Undo the last action

Redo Redo the last action

Copy Selected Cells Copy selected cells to the clip board

Paste Cells Paste the copied cells at the cursor insertion point

Select All Select all services in the table

Deselect All Clear all previously selected services.

Figure 4-18 Services table pop-up menu

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-65

Table 4-21 Services table pop-up menu (continued)

Option Description

Copy Service to Add Model Copies all of the parameters of the selected service to the

Add Service tool tip. The parameters are displayed on the

Add Service tool tip. To add a service with the copied

parameters, click the Add Service button. For more

information, see “Change Service Parameters and Copy to

a New Service” (p. 4-82).

Copy Cell to Add Model Copies the parameters of the selected cell to the Add

Service tool tip. The copied parameters are displayed on

the Add Service tool tip. To add a service with the copied

parameters, click the Add Service button. For more

information, see “Change Service Parameters and Copy to

a New Service” (p. 4-82).

Delete From Upper Steps Deletes the selected Services from upper steps in the

incremental design.

Line View... Opens the Line View pop up menu, which contains

commands to view working and protecting wavelengths in

a Line View report. For more information, see Figure 4-19,

“Line View... pop up menu” (p. 4-67)

Topo Highlight... Opens the Topo Highlight menu, which contains

commands to highlight services on the Topology Map. For

more information, see Figure 4-20, “Topo Highlight... pop

up menu” (p. 4-68).

Working [W] Constraints... Opens the Working Constraints pop up menu, which

contains commands to create or edit working constraints on

services. For more information, see Figure 4-21, “Working

[W] Constraints pop up menu” (p. 4-68).

Protecting [P] Constraints... Opens the Protecting Constraints pop up menu, which

contains commands to create or edit protecting constraints

on services. For more information, see Figure 4-22,

“Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu” (p. 4-69).

Set Mutual Disjointness Opens the Set Mutual Disjointness window for the selected

service to identify services as mutually disjointed for the

path computation. For more information, see “Set Mutual

Disjointness window” (p. 4-76).

Clear Mutual Disjointness Clears Mutual Disjointness setting for the selected service.

Navigate to Failure Report Opens the Show Failures Report, which indicates the

impact of failures in the network. For more information,

see “Show Failures Report” (p. 6-24).

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-66 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 4-21 Services table pop-up menu (continued)

Option Description

Ports View Opens the Ports View pop up menu, which contains

commands to manually manage ports on concentrators. For

more information, see “Manual Management of Ports on

Concentrators - Concepts” (p. 8-15) and “Manual

Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface”

(p. 8-16)

The Line View... menu contains commands to view working and protecting wavelengths

in a Line View report. To access this menu, right click in the Services table, and from the

Services table pop up menu, move the cursor to the Line View... command.

Table 4-22 Line View... pop up menu

Option Description

Highlight [W] in Line View (Full Spectrum) Opens the Line View (Full Spectrum) and

shows the working wavelength. (See Figure

6-28, “Line View (full spectrum) report”

(p. 6-43))

Highlight [W] in Line View (Compact) Opens the Line View (optimized) and shows

the working wavelength. (See Figure 6-28,

“Line View (full spectrum) report” (p. 6-43))

Highlight [P] in Line View (Full Spectrum) Opens the Line View (Full Spectrum) and

shows the protecting wavelength. (See Figure

6-28, “Line View (full spectrum) report”

(p. 6-43))

Highlight [P] in Line View (Compact) Opens the Line View (optimized) and shows

the protecting wavelength. (See Figure 6-28,

“Line View (full spectrum) report” (p. 6-43))

Figure 4-19 Line View... pop up menu

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-67

The Topo Highlight... menu contains commands to highlight services on the Topology

Map. To access this menu, right click in the Services table, and from the Services table

pop up menu, move the cursor to the Topo Highlight... command.

Table 4-23 Topo Highlight...pop up menu

Option Description

Highlight [W] Path Highlights working path on the Map.

Highlight [P] Path Highlights protecting path on the Map.

Highlight [W+P] Paths Highlights both working and protecting paths

on the Map.

The Working [W] Constraints pop up menu contains commands to create or edit

constraints on services. To access this menu, right click in the Services table, and from the

Services table pop up menu, move the cursor to the Working [W] Constraints command.

Table 4-24 Working [W] Constraints pop up menu

Option Description

Highlight [W] Path Constraints Highlight working path constraints for

services on the Topology Map

Freeze [W] Computed Path (Spatial Only) Prevent the computed spatial working path

from changing.

Figure 4-20 Topo Highlight... pop up menu

Figure 4-21 Working [W] Constraints pop up menu

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-68 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 4-24 Working [W] Constraints pop up menu (continued)

Option Description

Freeze [W] Computed Path (Spatial +

Spectral)

Prevent the computed spatial and spectral

working path from changing.

Set [W] Path Constraints from Map Selection Set working path constraints for services

selected on the Topology Map

Edit Spectral [W] Constraints Change spectral working path constraints for

services

Clear [W] Constraints Clear all working path constraints for services

The Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu contains commands to create or edit

protecting constraints on services. To access this menu, right click in the Services table,

and from the Services table pop up menu, move the cursor to the Protecting [P]

Constraints command.

Table 4-25 Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu

Option Description

Highlight [P] Path Constraints Highlight protecting path constraints for

services on the Topology Map

Freeze [P] Computed Path (Spatial Only) Prevent the computed spatial protecting path

from changing.

Freeze [P] Computed Path (Spatial + Spectral) Prevent the computed spatial and spectral

protecting path from changing.

Set [P] Path Constraints from Map Selection Set protecting path constraints for services

selected on the Topology Map

Figure 4-22 Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-69

Table 4-25 Protecting [P] Constraints pop up menu (continued)

Option Description

Edit Spectral [P] Constraints Change spectral protecting path constraints for

services

Clear [P] Constraints Clear all protecting path constraints for

relations.

Services parameters

Editable services parameters are indicated by a plus sign (+) before the parameter title.

These parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering the value in the

field. After changing the field value, press the Tab key or click in a different field.

Additional entry methods are indicated in the following tables.

Table 4-26 Services parameters

Parameter Definition Default value

Steps The step of the

incremental design in

which the service was

created.

S0. For more information on incremental

design, see “Incremental Design” (p. 4-6)

+Service Label The name of the

service

Editable field. Automatically generated by

ONDP in the format Service_ID

+Client Traffic Sets the client side

board for the service

Allowable values are defined in the

Transponder Bitrate and Encoding fields on

the Set Design Parameters window,

corresponding to the line side. The default is

defined by the value set in the TrxA field.

To change the Client Traffic field double click

the field and select from the list. For more

information, see “Setting Client Traffic,

Concentration, and OCH Line fields”

(p. 4-63).

+Concentration Sets the type of

concentration for the

service

Allowable values are determined by the Client

Traffic and Transponder Bitrate and

Encoding fields. Only allowable values are

displayed.

To change the Concentration field double

click the field and select from the list. For

more information, see “Setting Client Traffic,

Concentration, and OCH Line fields”

(p. 4-63).

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-70 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 4-26 Services parameters (continued)

Parameter Definition Default value

+OCH Line Sets the OCH line

type of this service

Allowable values are determined by the values

set in the Client Traffic, Transponder Bitrate

and Encoding, and Concentration fields.

To change the OCH Line field double click the

field and select from the list. For more

information, see “Setting Client Traffic,

Concentration, and OCH Line fields”

(p. 4-63).

+Working Source

A/D

Sets the working

source Add/Drop

block

Auto – ONDP sets the local OTS Add/Drop

block for the working source. The user can

select from a list of allowable Add/Drop

blocks. For more information, see

“Multidirectional Add/Drop blocks

differentiation” (p. 4-74)

This field only displays if the Rename

multidir blocks field on the Edit NE window

is checked for at least one multi-directional

TOADM NE in the network. For more

information, see “Edit NE window” (p. 4-18).

+Working

Destination A/D

Sets the working

destination local OTS

Add/Drop block

Auto – ONDP sets the local OTS Add/Drop

block for the working destination. The user

can select from a list of allowable Add/Drop

blocks. For more information, see

“Multidirectional Add/Drop blocks

differentiation” (p. 4-74)

This field only displays if the Rename

multidir blocks field on the Edit NE window

is checked for at least one multi-directional

TOADM NE in the network. For more

information, see “Edit NE window” (p. 4-18).

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-71

Table 4-26 Services parameters (continued)

Parameter Definition Default value

+Protecting Source

A/D

Sets the protecting

source local OTS

Add/Drop block

Auto – ONDP sets the local OTS Add/Drop

block for the protecting source. The user can

select from a list of allowable Add/Drop

blocks. For more information, see

“Multidirectional Add/Drop blocks

differentiation” (p. 4-74)

This field only displays if the Rename

multidir blocks field on the Edit NE window

is checked for at least one multi-directional

TOADM NE in the network. For more

information, see “Edit NE window” (p. 4-18).

+Protecting

Destination A/D

Sets the protecting

destination local OTS

Add/Drop block

Auto – ONDP sets the local OTS Add/Drop

block for the protecting destination. The user

can select from a list of allowable Add/Drop

blocks. For more information, see

“Multidirectional Add/Drop blocks

differentiation” (p. 4-74)

This field only displays if the Rename

multidir blocks field on the Edit NE window

is checked for at least one multi-directional

TOADM NE in the network. For more

information, see “Edit NE window” (p. 4-18).

+Protection Type Sets the protection of

the service

Unprotected

Select the Protection Type from the menu by

double clicking in the field. Changing this

field changes the value in the Protection Type

field in the Relations table. Possible values

are: Unprotected, Protection 1 + 1,

Restoration SBR or Restoration PRC.

Capacity [Mb/s] Identifies the capacity

in [Mb/s] of the

relation. Represents

the total capacity of

all the services in the

relation.

Varies, based on the values in the Client

Traffic field.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-72 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 4-26 Services parameters (continued)

Parameter Definition Default value

+Disjointness Sets disjoint

condition for diverse

path routing

Varies, based on the value selected in the

Protection Type field. Affects the routing of

the nominal and the protection path to have a

disjoint path only on link or on nodes and

links.

Mutual Disjointness Identifies the services

that are mutually

disjointed for the path

computation

Displays the label of the service specified on

the Set Mutual Disjointness window. For more

information, see “Set Mutual Disjointness

window” (p. 4-76).

Constraints Identifies the working

or protecting

constraints for the

spatial and/or spectral

paths.

Varies, base on the values set

Services table buttons

The Services table in the Edit Services window contains buttons which perform the

following actions.

Table 4-27 Services table button actions

Button Tool tip Description

Add a service with the specified

parameters to the relation. The tool tip

displays the parameters of the service

that will be added.

For more information on how to

change the parameter information

before adding the span, see “Change

Service Parameters and Copy to a

New Service” (p. 4-82).

Remove selected services Delete the highlighted services from

the relation.

Remove all services Delete all services from the relation.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-73

Multidirectional Add/Drop blocks differentiation

The following fields in the Edit Services window facilitate the differentiation of the

multidirectional Add/Drop blocks in multidirectional configurations.

• Working Source A/D

• Working Destination A/D

• Protecting Source A/D

• Protecting Destination A/D

Note: These fields display only if the user assigns a specific name to each

multidirectional Add/Drop block of at least one multidirectional NE in the network. This

is done by checking the Rename multidir blocks field on the Edit NE window, and

entering a one character string in the Multidir blocks name field for each Add/Drop

block. For more information, see “Edit NE window” (p. 4-18).

For each service, for the corresponding NE, these A/D fields set the Add/Drop block

supporting the associated transponder. The default value of these fields is Auto, meaning

the input is automatically set by ONDP. In the following cases, manual selection is

allowed, to change the value from that which is automatically set. Only allowable

selections are presented, based on the type of NE. The following are possible allowed

values:

• Uni – the service Add/Drop is performed on the corresponding fixed Add/Drop block

• Multi_# – the service Add/Drop is performed on the selected named multidirectional

Add/Drop block. The # is the name set in the Multidir blocks names field, in the Edit

NE window.

If no protection is defined for the service, a dash (-) displays in the Protecting Source

A/D and Protecting Destination A/D fields. This is not modifiable.

Edit Spectral Constraint window

The Edit Spectral Constraint window is used to manually define the spectral constraints

on a service, once the spatial constraint is defined. A spectral constraint can be both on the

working or protecting path.

Using the Edit Spectral Constraint window, the user can do the following:

• Add or remove 3Rs

• Define color constraints

• Identify conflicts between constraints and. ALC channels

For more information, see “Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints” (p. 4-86).

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-74 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

The following table describes the fields and options on the Edit Spectral Constraints

window.

Field/Option Description

Current Service: Identifies the name of the service and whether the

service is Working or Protecting

Slide Fields Slide left or right to decrease or increase the value.

Drop Select the Drop value from the list. Possible selections

are: Auto, Uni, or Multi_#

Add Select the Add value from the list. Possible selections

are: Auto, Uni, or Multi_#

Highlight on Map Highlights the service on the Topology Map

Figure 4-23 Edit Spectral Constraint window

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-75

Field/Option Description

Clear all 3Rs Remove all 3Rs from this service

Display “Frequency” Select from the pull-down list to change the displayed

information in the Edit Spectral Constraints window.

Possible selections are: Display “ITU Id”, Display

“Frequency”, or Display “Wavelength”.

Activate Single Color Check this box to have the same color on each trail.

Conflicts Count Indicates the number of constraints and/or ALC channel

conflicts

Set Mutual Disjointness window

The Set Mutual Disjointness window sets the services that are mutually disjointed for the

path computation.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-76 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 4-24 Set Mutual Disjointness window

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-77

Create a Relation

When to use

Use this task to create a relation. When a relation is created between two sites, a default

service is automatically created. Additionally, you can access the Edit Services window

and manually add any services.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Relations and Services” (p. 4-57)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to create a relation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:

• Select the Create Relation icon on the Topology Map toolbar.

• Right click the site to display the Site pop-up menu. From the Site pop-up menu,

select Create Relation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 On the Topology Map, click the Site from which the relation originates and drag the

cursor to the site on which the relation terminates.

Result: A red line representing a relation is created between the sites.

Note: To create services see the “Create Services” (p. 4-80) task.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Create a Relation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-78 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit Relations and Services

When to use

Relations and Services are viewable and editable from the Edit Services window. Use this

task to view and edit relations and services.

Warning: Interaction occurs between the Relations table and the Services table. Changing

a parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other. For example, if the

Services Count is changed in the Relations table, the services for the relation are

redefined in the Services table.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Relations and Services” (p. 4-57)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to view and edit relations and services.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Display the Edit Services window by doing one of the following:

• From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path:

Inputs > Edit Relation/Services

• Right click a relation on the Topology Map. From the Relations pop-up window,

select Highlight in Table.

Result: The Edit Services window is displayed. Relations that are selected on the

Topology Map are highlighted in the table. For an illustration of the Edit Services

window, see “Edit Services window” (p. 4-57).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Edit the relations/services parameters. For a description of the relation parameters, see

Table 4-21, “Services table pop-up menu ” (p. 4-65). For a description of the services

parameters, see Table 4-26, “Services parameters” (p. 4-70).

Result: The relations and services are changed.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Edit Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-79

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create Services

When to use

Use this task to create a relation. When a relation is created between two sites, a service is

not automatically created. To create services, access the Edit Services window and

manually add any services.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Relations and Services” (p. 4-57)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to create a relation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “Create a Relation” (p. 4-78) task to create a relation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Display the Edit Services window by doing one of the following:

• From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path:

Inputs > Edit Relation/Services

• Right click a relation on the Topology Map. From the Relations pop-up window,

select Highlight in Table.

Result: The Edit Services window is displayed. Relations that are selected on the

Topology Map are highlighted in the table. For an illustration of the Edit Services

window, see “Edit Services window” (p. 4-57).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If not already done so, select a relation in the Relations table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Do one of the following to add services to the selected relation.

• In the Relations table, click in the Services Count field and enter the number of

services.

• In the Services table, mouse over the Add Service button on the left side of the table.

If the Service parameters are correct, click the Add Service button.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Create Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-80 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Note: The Add Service button tool tip displays the parameters of the service that are

added. To change the parameters of a service and copy them to a new service, see

“Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service” (p. 4-82).

Result: Services are created for the relation and the associated parameters are

redefined in the tables.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Create Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-81

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service

When to use

Use this task to Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service.

Warning: Interaction occurs between the Relations table and the Services table. Changing

a parameter in one table can affect the parameters in the other.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Relations and Services” (p. 4-57)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to change the service information displayed in the Add

Service button tool tip and copy to a new service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the first step in the “Edit Relations and Services” (p. 4-79) to display the Edit

Services window.

Result: The Edit Services window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the relation to which service will be added.

Result: The relation is selected and the services in the relation are displayed in the

Services table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Services table, select the service to copy.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Do one of the following:

• To copy all the service parameters to the Add Service button tool tip, right click in the

table to display the Services table pop-up menu, and select Copy Service to Add

Model.

• To change a parameter in the service, edit the service parameter, right click in the

table to display the Services table pop-up menu, and select Copy Cell to Add Model.

Note: The Copy Cell to Add Model function is not available for the Client traffic,

Concentration, or OCH Line parameters.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-82 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Result: The Service parameter information is changed in the Add Service button tool

tip. To view the change applied to the Add Model, mouse over the Add Service button

for at least one second.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click the Add Service button.

Result: The new service is added to the table below the selected row.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-83

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete Relations and Services

When to use

Use this task to delete relations and services from the network design.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Relations and Services” (p. 4-57)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to delete relations and services from the network design.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:

• Follow the first step in the “Edit Relations and Services” (p. 4-79) task to display the

Edit Services window and select the relations or services to be deleted. Do one of the

following:

– Click the Remove selected relations or the Remove selected services button.

– From the Relations table, select the Remove all relations button.

– From the Services table, select the Remove all services button.

• From the Topology Map, select the relations to be deleted. Do one of the following:

– Click the Delete Selected icon from the toolbar.

– From the Main menu, follow this path:

Edit > Delete Selected.

– Right click the Map and select Delete All Selected from the Map pop-up menu.

Result: The relations and services are deleted.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Delete Relations and Services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-84 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Identify a Relation on the Map

When to use

Use this task to identify a relation on the Topology Map.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Relations and Services” (p. 4-57)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task, a relation must be created.

Task

Complete the following steps to identify relations on the Map.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the first step in the “Edit Relations and Services” (p. 4-79) task to display the Edit

Services window.

Result: The Edit Services window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select a relation by clicking the relation row. Multiple relations can be selected by

holding the [Shift] key while selecting relations.

Result: The relations are selected.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Right click in the Edit Services window.

Result: The Relations pop-up window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Relations pop-up window, select Highlight All Selected on Map.

Result: The selected relations are highlighted on the Topology Map.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Identify a Relation on the Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-85

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints

When to use

Use this task to create or edit spectral constraints for working and protecting paths.

The use of spectral and spacial routing constraints enables the user to impact the Routing

and Wavelength Allocation (RWA) of services. It is possible to specify both the path

(spatial constraint) and the wavelength (spectral constraint). The spatial constraint must

be defined before the spectral constraint.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Relations and Services” (p. 4-57)

• “Edit Spectral Constraint window” (p. 4-74)

• “Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints” (p. 4-86)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task, a relation must be created.

Task

Complete the following steps to create or edit spectral constraints for working and

protecting paths.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 On the Topology Map, highlight the link associated with the relation/service for which the

spectral constraints will be set.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Open the Edit Services window using one of the following methods.

• Right click on the relation on the Topology Map, and select Highlight in Table from

the Relation pop-up menu

• From the Main menu, select Inputs > Edit Relations/Services. Select the relation

associated with the link selected in Step 1.

Result: The Edit Services window is displayed, and the relation is highlighted in the

Relations table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Edit Services window, select the service(s) from the Services table.

Note: If a service is not selected, the constraints will be set for all services in the relation.

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-86 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Right click in the Relations table or Services table to display the table pop-up menu.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the table pop-up menu, select Working [W] Constraints... or Protecting [P]

Constraints....

Result: The Working [W] Constraints... or the Protecting [P] Constraints... pop-up

menu is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 From the Working [W] Constraints... or Protecting [P] Constraints... pop-up menu, select

either Set [W] Path Constraints from Map Selection or Set [P] Path Constraints from

Map Selection.

Result: The Constraints field changes to W[Manu S] or P[Manu S].

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select the service(s) in the Service table for which the spectral constraints will be set.

Right click in the Services table to display the Services table pop-up menu.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 From the Services table pop-up menu, select Edit Working [W] Constraints... or Edit

Protecting [P] Constraints.

Result: The Edit Spectral Constraints window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Edit the spectral constraints for the working or protecting path.

Result: The constraint is set.

After running the design, the user can freeze the computed path in order to perform a new

design with the previously computed path as a constraint. To freeze the computed path

follow these steps:

• From the Services table, right click on the constraints to display the Service table

pop-up menu

• From the Services table pop-up menu, select Working [W] Constraints or Protecting

[P] Constraints to display the Working [W] Constraints or Protecting [P] Constraints

pop-up menu

• From the Working [W] Constraints pop-up menu or the Protecting [P] Constraints

pop-up menu, select either Freeze Computed Path (Spatial Only) or Freeze

Computed Path (Spatial + Spectral)

Design Inputs

Section 5: Relations and Services

Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-87

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 6: Optical Subsets

Overview

Purpose

This section provides information on optical subsets.

Contents

Optical Subsets 4-89

Create Optical Subset 4-97

Design Inputs Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-88 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Optical Subsets

Optical Subset

An optional step in network planning and design is to consider grouping channels into

optical subsets. In ONDP, optical subsets allow the user to manage the following:

• Subset name

• Subset Channel Mask – channels not included are forbidden. Selection can be by

channel spacing mask or specific mask

• Maximum number of channel supported by the subset

• Allowed line bitrate and encoding

• Line tuning preference

For information on how to perform tasks related to optical subsets, see:

• “Create Optical Subset” (p. 4-97)

Edit Optical Subsets window

The Edit Optical Subsets window is used to configure parameters of the Optical Subset.

To access the Edit Optical Subsets window, follow this menu path: Inputs > Edit Optical

Subsets

Optical Subset parameters

Editable Optical Subset parameters are indicated by a plus sign (+) appearing before the

parameter title. These parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering

the value in the Edit Optical Subsets window. To change a field, press the Tab key or click

in a different field.

Figure 4-25 Edit Optical Subsets window

Design Inputs

Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-89

Warning: Interaction occurs between the Links window, as well as other affected

windows and reports throughout the tool. For example, if the Name field is changed on

the Edit Optical Subset window, the Subset name will change in the Edit Spans window,

and reports in which Subset name is contained.

Table 4-28 Optical Subset parameters

Parameter Definition Default value

+Name Name to identify the

subset

System generated. Editable field. Any string of

characters allowed.

+Channel Mask Sets the channel mask

of the subset by

channel spacing or

specific mask.

Channels not selected

are excluded from the

subset.

Possible values are:

• Global – (default) – all channels are

included in the subset

• 50 GHz

• 100 GHz

• 200 GHz

• DSF mask: 16 fixed ch

• DSF masks: 2 Forghieri grids

For more information, see “Channel Mask

parameter” (p. 4-92).

Channel Max

Number

Maximum number of

channels supported

by the subset links.

Auto. Controlled globally on the Set Design

Parameters window. User is able to edit this

field. For more information see, “Channel max

number parameter” (p. 4-93)

+Allowed Bitrate and

Encoding

The bitrate and

encoding allowed for

this subset.

Auto. Controlled globally on the Set Design

Parameters window. The user is able to edit

this field by selecting from the allowed values

in the list. For more information, see

“Transponder bitrate & encoding” (p. 4-118).

+Line Tuning Pref. The line tuning

optimization

preference for this

subset

APE. If line tuning preference is applicable to a

link, the specified line tuning is used. This is

typically used for a fixed terminal - fixed

terminal configuration. Line tuning preference

is applicable to a link when it is possible to

make a design based on APE or on APA.

Note: APA design is not guaranteed.

Edit Optical Subsets pop-up menu

The Edit Optical Subsets window contains a pop-up menu that offers additional actions to

configure subsets. To access the Edit Optical Subsets pop-up menu, right click any field

in the table.

Design Inputs

Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-90 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

The following table describes the options in the Edit Optical Subsets window pop-up

menu.

Table 4-29 Edit Optical Subsets pop-up menu

Option Description

Undo Undo the last action

Redo Redo the last action

Copy Selected Cells Copy selected cells to the clip board

Paste Cells Paste the copied cells at the cursor insertion point

Select All Select all links on the map

Deselect All Clear all previously selected links.

Edit Selected Subset Mask Open the Edit Subset Mask window to change the

properties of the selected subset mask. For more

information, see “Edit Subset Mask window” (p. 4-95).

Highlight All Selected on Map Highlight on the Topology Map, the subsets that are

selected in the Edit Optical Subsets window

Figure 4-26 Edit Optical Subsets window pop-up menu

Design Inputs

Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-91

Optical Subsets table buttons

The Optical Subsets table in the Edit Optical Subsets window contains buttons which

perform the following actions.

Table 4-30 Optical Subsets table button actions

Button Tool tip Description

Add Optical Subset Add a default optical subset to the

table. After adding the default subset,

the user can edit the subset as

required.

Remove selected optical

subsets

Delete the highlighted optical subsets

from the network design.

Remove all optical subsets Delete all optical subsets from the

network design. Note: At least one

optical subset must remain on the

Optical Subsets window.

Channel Mask parameter

The Channel Mask parameter sets the channel mask of the subset by either channel

spacing selection or by a specific mask. Channels not specified by the mask are excluded

from the subset.

Channel mask selection by channel spacing mask

The default Global channel mask is set by the Channel spacing parameter in the Set

Design Parameters window. Possible values to set the Channel spacing globally are: 50

GHz, 100 GHz, or 200 GHz.To access this field, follow this path:

Inputs > Set Design Parameters window > Channel Setting tab > Channel

spacing

The user can change the Global channel spacing setting in the Channel Mask field on the

Edit Optical Subsets window. The subset selected value cannot be lower than the Global

Channel spacing value. If the Global Channel spacing is increased in the Design

Parameters window, the subset channel spacings are automatically increased to that value

if the subset values were lower.

For more information on the setting the default channel spacing for the entire network,

see “Channel spacing parameter” (p. 4-119)

Design Inputs

Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-92 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Channel mask selection by specific mask

Specific subset masks can also be set for network designs that include G653 Dispersion

Shifted Fiber (DSF), which carries irregular channel spacing. Two subset mask settings

are supported:

• DSF mask: 16 fixed chs – for more information, see “DSF mask: 16 fixed channels”

(p. 4-93)

• DSF mask: 2 Foghieri grids – For more information, see “DSF Mask: 2 Forghieri

grids” (p. 4-94)

Channel max number parameter

The Channel max number parameter allows the user to set the maximum number of

channels supported by links in the specified subset. This parameter is set globally in the

Transponder bitrate and encoding parameter on the Set Design Parameters window.

The default of Auto in this field indicates the value is the same as the global parameter.

The user is able to edit this field. Possible values are 1 to 96, except where limited by the

architecture. For more information, see “Transponder bitrate & encoding” (p. 4-118).

Channel Allocations for G653 DSF

The following sections describe the channel allocations for the selected Channel Mask if

G653 DSF is in the subset.

50GHz, 100 GHz, and 200 GHz channel spacing

For network designs containing G653 DSF that choose 50GHz, 100 GHz, and 200 GHz

channel spacing for the Channel Mask, channel allocation to Band 5 is forbidden.

Therefore the following channels number of channels are available for the OMS:

• Channels loaded at 50 GHz – only 88 channels are available for the OMS if DSF is in

the OMS

• Channels loaded at 100 GHz – only 44 channels are available for the OMS if DSF is

in the OMS

• Channels loaded at 200 GHz – only 22 channels are available for the OMS if DSF is

in the OMS

DSF mask: 16 fixed channels

The following table lists the channel allocation for network designs containing G653 DSF

that specify a G653 DSF fixed grid of 16 channels for the Channel Mask,

Channel Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)

16 195.850 1530.73

15 195.700 1531.89

14 195.450 1533.86

Design Inputs

Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-93

Channel Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm)

13 195.250 1535.43

12 194.900 1538.19

11 194.600 1540.56

10 194.450 1541.75

9 193.700 1547.72

8 193.300 1550.92

7 193.100 1552.52

6 192.750 1555.34

5 192.450 1557.77

4 192.300 1558.98

3 192.050 1561.01

2 191.850 1562.64

1 191.600 1564.68

DSF Mask: 2 Forghieri grids

The Channel Mask DSF Mask: 2 Forghieri grids allows ONDP to provide a Channel

Mask based on a Forghieri grid with 8 channels with irregular channel spacing.

The typical Forghieri grid uses a 1–3–2 format where:

• Based on the specified first frequency (Example: v1 = 193.90 THz)

• The 2nd frequency is 100 GHz from the 1st (Example: v2 = 193.80THz)

• The 3rd frequency is 300 GHz from the 2nd (Example: v3 = 193.50 THz)

• The 4th frequency is 200 GHz from the 3rd (Example: v4 = 193.30 THz)

ONDP supports 2 Forghieri grids, therefore 2 first frequencies are specified for this mask.

For information on how to modify these channel mask frequency values, see “Edit Subset

Mask window” (p. 4-95). The default frequencies the ONDP provides for the DSF Mask:

2 Foghieri grids channel mask are:

• Grid 1 – 193.90 THz.

• Grid 2 – 192.00 THz

The user can modify the default first frequencies, however the 2 Forghieri grids must be

separated by at lease 10 nm. Additionally, if one of the 8 channels is in Band 5, an error

message is given, and the user is directed to choose another frequency for the mask.

Design Inputs

Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-94 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Edit Subset Mask window

The Edit Subset Mask window allows the user to manage the Channel Mask properties of

the specified subset. To access this window, select a subset on the Edit Optical Subsets

window, and right click to display the Edit Optical Subsets pop-up menu. From the menu,

select Edit Selected Subset Mask.

The following table describes the fields and options on the Edit Subset Mask window

Field/Option Description

Edit Subset Name Identifies the name of the subset mask and

allows the user to edit the subset mask name.

Figure 4-27 Edit Subset Mask window

Design Inputs

Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-95

Field/Option Description

Select Mask Type Identifies the subset mask type and allows the

user to change the type of subset mask

Possible values are:

• Global – (default) – all channels are

included in the subset

• 50 GHz

• 100 GHz

• 200 GHz

• DSF mask: 16 fixed chs

• DSF masks: 2 Forghieri grids

For more information, see “Channel Mask

parameter” (p. 4-92).

Edit Forghieri Grid 1 Frequency Enter the starting frequency for the 1st

Forghieri Grid in GHz, or use the slide to

select it. The computed irregular channel

frequencies based on the 1–3–2 Forghieri Grid

spacing are listed below the field. For more

information, see “DSF Mask: 2 Forghieri

grids” (p. 4-94)

Edit Forghieri Grid 2 Frequency Enter the starting frequency for the 2nd

Forghieri Grid in GHz, or use the slide to

select it. The computed irregular channel

frequencies based on the 1–3–2 Forghieri Grid

spacing are listed below the field. For more

information, see “DSF Mask: 2 Forghieri

grids” (p. 4-94)

Design Inputs

Section 6: Optical Subsets

Optical Subsets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-96 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Create Optical Subset

When to use

Use this task to create an optical subset. By default, all channels are included in the subset

provided by ONDP named subset_1.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Optical Subsets” (p. 4-89)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to create an optical subset.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path: Inputs > Edit Optical Subsets.

Result: The Edit Optical Subsets window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Edit Optical Subsets window, click the Add Optical Subset button.

Result: A default optical subset is added to the table. Edit the newly created subset as

required.

Design Inputs

Section 6: Optical Subsets

Create Optical Subset

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-97

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure

Scope

Overview

Purpose

This section provides information on how to create, view, and edit Shared Risk Groups

(SRGs) and Failure Scope.

Contents

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) 4-99

Failures Scope 4-105

Create an SRG 4-109

Include/Exclude Links/Sites in SRGs 4-110

Delete SRGs 4-111

Edit a Failures Scope 4-112

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-98 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

An additional step in network planning and design is to consider the Shared Risk Groups.

A Shared Risk Group is a set of networking resources that experience the same risk of

being affected by a failure, such as a cable cut. A common risk exists for the elements of

the group. SRGs permit protection of traffic on a spare route which is different from the

main route, avoiding the risk of the same problem affecting all resources in the group. For

example, if an SRG consists of Link 1 and Link 2, a failure on the SRG affects both links.

Therefore, the working and protecting path must not use both links to protect from failure

of both links at the same time.

For information on how to perform tasks related to SRGs, see the following:

• “Create an SRG” (p. 4-109)

• “Include/Exclude Links/Sites in SRGs” (p. 4-110)

• “Delete SRGs” (p. 4-111)

Edit SRGs window

The Edit SRGs window is used to configure SRGs. The window contains two tabs:

Contents and Parameters.

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-99

Figure 4-28 Edit SRGs window Contents tab

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-100 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Edit SRGs window Main menu

The Edit SRGs window Main menu contains the following options:

• SRG

• Included

• Excluded

Figure 4-29 Edit SRGs window Parameters tab

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-101

SRG menu

SRG menu command Description

Create New Create a new SRG

Delete Selected Delete a selected SRG

Delete All SRGs Delete All SRGs from the network design

Included menu

Links/Sites can be included in SRGs using the Included commands.

Table 4-31 Included menu

Included menu commands Description

Select All Select all Links/Sites in the Included list of the

Edit SRG window

Select None Clear any link in the Included list of the Edit

SRG window

Highlight All On Map Highlight all Links/Sites in the Included list of

the Edit SRG window on the Topology Map

Figure 4-30 SRG menu

Figure 4-31 Included menu

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-102 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 4-31 Included menu (continued)

Included menu commands Description

Highlight Selected On Map Highlight on the Topology Map only the

Links/Sites selected in the Included list of the

Edit SRG window

Set From Map Selection Include the Links/Sites selected on the

Topology Map in the SRG. Links/Sites that are

not selected on the Topology Map are moved

to the Excluded list

Transfer Map Selection Highlight in the Included list of the Edit SRG

window the Links/Sites selected on the

Topology Map

Excluded Menu

Links/Sites can be excluded from SRGs using the Excluded menu commands.

Table 4-32 Excluded menu

Excluded menu commands Description

Select All Select all Links/Sites in the Excluded list of

the Edit SRG window

Select None Clear any Links/Sites in the Excluded list of

the Edit SRG window

Highlight All On Map Highlight all Links/Sites in the Excluded list

of the Edit SRG window on the Topology Map

Highlight Selected On Map Highlight on the Topology Map only the

Links/Sites selected in the Excluded list of the

Edit SRG window

Figure 4-32 Excluded menu

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-103

Table 4-32 Excluded menu (continued)

Excluded menu commands Description

Set From Map Selection Exclude the Links/Sites selected on the

Topology Map in the SRG. Links/Sites that are

not selected on the Topology Map are moved

to the Included list.

Transfer Map Selection Highlight in the Excluded list of the Edit SRG

window the Links/Sites selected on the

Topology Map

Transfer buttons

On the Edit SRG window, Links/Sites are moved between the Included list and the

Excluded list by selecting Links/Sites in either list and clicking a Transfer button.

Links/Sites that have been moved from one list are highlighted in the list to which they

have been moved.

Figure 4-33 Transfer buttons

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-104 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Failures Scope

Failures Scope

An additional step in network planning and design is to consider the Failures Scope.

The Failures Scope defines the elements that will fail when performing a failure analysis.

By default, all line links (OMS) and all SRGs are included in the failure scope, and all

multirect Add/Drop blocks and all sites (nodes) are excluded in the failure scope. Failures

Scope allows the user to choose the set of resources (links, nodes, and SRGs) that will

fail. This feature enables the user to refine the failure analysis, study specific scenarios or

reduce the time of the simulation.

For information on how to perform tasks related to Failures Scope, see the following:

• “Edit a Failures Scope” (p. 4-112)

Edit Failures Scope window

The Edit Failures Scope window is used to define manually the scope of the failure.

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Failures Scope

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-105

Edit Failures Scope window menu

The Edit Failures Scope window contains the following options:

• Included

• Excluded

Included menu

Links, SRGs, and Sites can be included in the failure scope using the Included menu

commands.

Table 4-33 Included menu

Included menu commands Description

Select All Select all resources in the Included list of the

Edit Failures Scope window

Select None Clear any resource in the Included list of the

Edit Failures Scope window

Highlight All On Map Highlight all resources in the Included list of

the Edit Failures Scope window on the

Topology Map

Highlight Selected On Map Highlight on the Topology Map only the

resources selected in the Included list of the

Edit Failures Scope window

Set From Map Selection Include the resources selected on the Topology

Map in the failure scope. Resources that are

not selected on the Topology Map are moved

to the Excluded list.

Transfer Map Selection Highlight in the Included list of the Edit

Failures Scope window the resources selected

on the Topology Map

Figure 4-34 Included menu

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Failures Scope

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-106 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Excluded Menu

Links, SRGs, and Sites can be excluded from the failures scope using the Excluded menu

commands.

Table 4-34 Excluded menu

Excluded menu commands Description

Select All Select all resources in the Excluded list of the

Edit Failures Scope window

Select None Clear any resource in the Excluded list of the

Edit Failures Scope window

Highlight All On Map Highlight all resources in the Excluded list of

the Edit Failures Scope window on the

Topology Map

Highlight Selected On Map Highlight on the Topology Map only the

resources selected in the Excluded list of the

Edit Failures Scope window

Set From Map Selection Exclude the resources selected on the

Topology Map in the failure scope. Resources

that are not selected on the Topology Map are

moved to the Included list.

Transfer Map Selection Highlight in the Excluded list of the Edit

Failures Scope window the resources selected

on the Topology Map

Figure 4-35 Excluded menu

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Failures Scope

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-107

Transfer buttons

On the Edit Failures Scope window, resources are moved between the Included list and

the Excluded list by selecting resources in either list and clicking a Transfer button.

Resources that have been moved from one list are highlighted in the list to which they

have been moved.

Figure 4-36 Transfer buttons

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Failures Scope

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-108 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Create an SRG

When to use

Use this task to create an SRG.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)” (p. 4-99)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to create an SRG.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path: Inputs > Edit SRGs.

Result: The Edit SRGs window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Edit SRGs window Main menu, follow this path: SRG > Create New.

Result: The Parameters tab of the Edit SRGs window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter the name of the SRG in the Label field and click Apply.

Result: The SRG is created. As the default, no Links/Sites are included in the SRG.

To include or exclude Links/Sites in the SRG, see “Include/Exclude Links/Sites in

SRGs” (p. 4-110).

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Create an SRG

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-109

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Include/Exclude Links/Sites in SRGs

When to use

Use this task to include and exclude Links/Sites in an SRG.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)” (p. 4-99)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task the SRG must be created. Follow the steps in the “Create an

SRG” (p. 4-109) task to create an SRG.

Task

Complete the following steps to include and exclude Links/Sites in an SRG.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select an SRG from the list of SRGs in the Edit SRGs window.

Result: The Included and Excluded Links/Sites for the selected SRG are displayed in

the Contents tab of the Edit SRGs window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Use any of the following methods in combination or alone to include or exclude

Links/Sites in an SRG.

• Select Links/Sites in either the Included or Excluded column and move as desired

between the columns using the direction arrows.

• Select Links/Sites on the Topology map and then select the Set from Map Selection

item in either the Included menu or Excluded menu in the Edit SRG Main menu.

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Include/Exclude Links/Sites in SRGs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-110 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete SRGs

When to use

Use this task to delete an SRG.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Shared Risk Groups (SRGs)” (p. 4-99)

Before you begin

Before beginning this task the SRG must be created. Follow the steps in the “Create an

SRG” (p. 4-109) task to create an SRG.

Task

Complete the following steps to delete an SRG.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select an SRG from the list of SRGs in the Edit SRGs window.

Result: The Included and Excluded Links/Sites for the selected SRG are displayed in

the Contents tab of the Edit SRGs window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Main menu, select SRG > Delete Selected.

Result: The selected SRG is deleted. Note: To delete all SRGs, select SRG > Delete

All SRGs.

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Delete SRGs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-111

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Edit a Failures Scope

When to use

Use this task to edit the Failures Scope.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Failures Scope” (p. 4-105)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to include and exclude resources in the Failures Scope.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Topology map Main menu, select the Inputs menu.

Result: The Inputs menu is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do one of the following:

• If the checkbox in the Automatic Failure Scope command is checked, click the

checkbox to unselect.

• If the checkbox in the Automatic Failure Scope command is not checked, select Edit

Failure Scope.

Result: The Edit Failures Scope window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Use any of the following methods in combination or alone to include or exclude resources

in the Failures Scope.

• Select resources in either the Included or Excluded column and move as desired

between the columns using the direction arrows.

• Select resources on the Topology map and select the Set from Map Selection item in

either the Included menu or Excluded menu in the Edit Failures scope Main menu.

Result: The Included and Excluded resources are displayed in the Included or

Excluded column of the Edit Failures Scope window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Apply.

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Edit a Failures Scope

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-112 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Result: The Failures Scope is saved and the Edit Failures Scope window is closed.

Design Inputs

Section 7: Shared Risk Groups (SRGs) and Failure Scope

Edit a Failures Scope

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-113

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Section 8: Design Parameters

Overview

Purpose

This section provides information on how to create, view, and edit design parameters.

Contents

Design Parameters 4-115

WDM Layer Design Parameters 4-117

Traffic Setting Design Parameters 4-122

Set Design Parameters 4-125

Design Inputs

Section 8: Design Parameters

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-114 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Design Parameters

Design Parameters

The next step in network planning and design is to consider the design parameters.

Set Design Parameters window

The Set Design Parameters panel is used to configure the WDM layer options and

optimization settings details. The window is divided into tabs which facilitate the design

configuration.

To access the Design Parameters panel follow this path from the Main menu:

Inputs > Set Design Parameters

Design Inputs

Section 8: Design Parameters

Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-115

Figure 4-37 Set Design Parameters window

Design Inputs

Section 8: Design Parameters

Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-116 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

WDM Layer Design Parameters

WDM Layer tab

The WDM Layer tab contains configuration options for the WDM layer.

Figure 4-38 WDM Layer tab

Design Inputs

Section 8: Design Parameters

WDM Layer Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-117

Channel Properties parameters

The following sections describe the WDM layer Channel Properties.

Transponder bitrate & encoding

The Transponder bitrate & encoding field defines the size of the channel/trail that is set

on the WDM layer for TrxA and TrxB. Possible values are:

• OCH10G~NRZ

• OCH10G~NRZ~MLSE

• OCH40G~PDPSK

• OCH40G~PDPSK~PMDC

• OCH40G~PDPSK~EFEC

• OCH40G~PDPSK~EFEC~PMDC

• OCH40G~COHERENT

• OCH100G~NRZ~PDMQPSK~EFEC

• OCH100G~NRZ~XR~PDMQPSK~EFEC

Note 1: For mixed formats 40G~PDPSK~XXXX/10G, it is recommended that the

40G~PDPSK~XXXX equipment is specified in the TrxA field.

Note 2:For mixed formats between either a OCH40G~COHERENT,

OCH100G~NRZ~PDMQPSK~EFEC, or OCH100G~NRZ~XR~PDMQPSK~EFEC and a

non-coherent format, OCH40G~COHERENT, OCH100G~NRZ~PDMQPSK~EFEC, or

OCH100G~NRZ~XR~PDMQPSK~EFEC must be specified in the TrxA field.

Note 3: If Free DCU is specified in the Dispersion Compensation field, only

OCH40G~COHERENT, OCH100G~NRZ~PDMQPSK~EFEC, and

OCH100G~NRZ~XR~PDMQPSK~EFEC formats are allowed in the TrxA and TrxB fields.

The field next to the TrxA and TrxB fields contains the maximum capacity per fiber for

the specified granularity. The default value is 80. Possible values are 1 - 96. This value

corresponds to the maximum number of wavelengths that a link could have.

The 10G TRB field defines the type of 10 G transponder for the entire network. Possible

values are TR2D1191 or TRBD1191.

Dispersion Compensation

The Dispersion Compensation field determines the Dispersion Compensation Module

(DCM) option that is used for spans.

• Mix DCF & DC FBG for long span – for long spans Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG) is

used. For spans that are not long, Dispersion Compensation Fiber (DCF) is used. The

Mix DCF & DC FBG for long span option is the default.

• Full FBG – for applications in which spans are not long, DCF modules are replaced by

FBG modules to improve optical performance. In this case, all DCM are FBG.

Design Inputs

Section 8: Design Parameters

WDM Layer Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-118 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

• Full DCF (no FBG) – for applications in which spans are long, all FBG modules are

replaced by DCF modules. In this case, all DCM are DCF.

• Free DCU – for applications using 40 G coherent granularity only. No FBG modules

or DCM modules.

Dispersion Compensation parameter

The Dispersion Compensation field determines the Dispersion Compensation Module

(DCM) option that is used for spans.

• Mix DCF & DC FBG for long span – for long spans Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG) is

used. For spans that are not long, Dispersion Compensation Fiber (DCF) is used.

• Full FBG – for applications in which spans are not long, DCF modules are replaced by

FBG modules to improve optical performance. In this case, all DCM are FBG.

• Full DCF (no FBG) – for applications in which spans are long, all FBG modules are

replaced by DCF modules. In this case, all DCM are DCF.

• Free DCU – allowed only for applications using xx G coherent granularity only. No

FBG modules or DCM modules. This is the default value if only xxG coherent

formats are present in the design. The Full DCF (no FBG) option is the default one

where at least one non coherent format is present in the design.

Channel spacing parameter

The Channel spacing parameter sets the default channel spacing for the network.

Possible values to set the Channel spacing globally are: 50 GHz, 100 GHz, or 200 GHz.

For information on channel spacing for optical subsets, see “Optical Subsets” (p. 4-89).

Ratio of concentrator ports to use parameter

The Ratio of concentrator ports to use field defines the maximum number of

concentrator ports to reserve for further use. A value of 1 indicates that 100% of the

concentrator ports can be used. A value of .05 indicates that only half of the concentrator

ports can be used. The value applies to all concentrators in the network. For ETHC boards

there is a maximum of 9 concentrator ports. For TRBC boards, the maximum ports is 4.

Amplifier Properties

The following sections describe the WDM layer Amplifier Properties.

Use 23 dBm

Activation of this field enables the line design to put an extra pump on the in-line

amplifier and booster if needed.

Design Inputs

Section 8: Design Parameters

WDM Layer Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-119

Min BOL SL for RMPM (dB)

Sets the minimum BOL SL for Raman pump. Used for raman amplification, this

parameter sets the threshold above which the raman amplification is used. The value set is

the threshold which is applied on the Beginning of Life (BOL) span losses. ONDP

provides raman span padding which ensures the raman amplifiers will work properly, by

adding the necessary attenuator amount to compensate for the difference.

Padding fuse span (dB)

Sets the padding fuse span. By default, ONDP merges two successive spans as soon as the

sum of their losses falls below PFS -1 (1 PFS is due to the connector merging the two

spans). Increasing the value of this parameter allows more spans to be merged. Merging

more spans reduces the cost of the network but also reduces the optical transparency.

Alarms for amplifier gain out of range parameters

The following sections describe the fields to set the Alarms for amplifier gains out of

range. This parameter is supported only for line amplifiers (LOFA), and not for Add/Drop

amplifiers

Two values are calculated when a design is run and are set on an NE during installation.

These values are the thresholds needed to track (alarm) any silent failure on the WDM

line which results in a variation of the amplifier gain outside of a planned range. The

GMPLS uses this alarm to avoid using a line (restoration and forced traffic addition)

which is out of the planned design contractual limit, which results in a gain out of range.

If this feature is activated, ONDP calculates the values as follows:

• Minimum Acceptable Gain (Gmin) – indicates the minimum optimal gain, minus the

Gmin/Gmax margin.

• Maximum Acceptable Gain (Gmax) – indicates the gain End of Life plus the

Gmin/Gmax margin. (The gain End of Life is calculated as the gain at the beginning

of life plus the end of life margin).

The Gain Margin ONDP parameters allow the user to modify the Gmin/Gmax margin

value used to calculate the above values.

Activate

Click the checkbox to activate the Alarms for amplifier gain out of range feature. The

default state of this field is deactivated (blank). When this feature is deactivated, the Gain

Margin Value field are not accessible (greyed out). When checked, the Gain Margin Value

field become accessible. When this field is deactivated, the Gmin/Gmax default values

are provisioned.

Design Inputs

Section 8: Design Parameters

WDM Layer Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-120 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Gain Margin Value

Click the slide indicator and move the mouse right or left to change the value indicated in

the Gain Margin Value field. The default value for this field is +2 dB. The allowable

range is +2 dB to 5 dB, with incremental steps of .25 dB allowed.

OMSs used parameters

Consider also unused OMSs

Click the checkbox to enable ONDP to consider in the design, all OMSs in the network

whether the links carry traffic or not. Conversely, if this checkbox is blank, only OMSs

used in transmission are considered in the network design.

Design Inputs

Section 8: Design Parameters

WDM Layer Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-121

Traffic Setting Design Parameters

Traffic Setting tab

Routing

The Routing section set the Routing options

Figure 4-39 Traffic Setting tab

Design Inputs

Section 8: Design Parameters

Traffic Setting Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-122 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Number of shortest path

The Number of shortest path field sets the number of shortest paths to be computed and

used during the RWA optimization. Default is 30.

Most disjoint on links/nodes

The Most disjoint on links/nodes checkbox indicates that certain design constraints are

released if no other solution is available. Checking the Most disjoint on links/nodes

checkbox allows certain conditions to infringe the disjointness rules that have been set.

This feature is only applicable to nominal and restored paths. It is not applicable to

GMRE Simulator cases (GMRE Audit Logs).

Protection

The Protection section sets the protection options.

Failures Count

The Failures Count field sets the number of failures per service. This field enables the

simulation of a failures in the network and restored services. SBR (Source Based

Restoration) is an unprotected service with restoration capability. PRC (Protection and

Restoration Combined) is a 1+1 protection service with restoration capability. The

minimum value for SBR is 1; 0 is not allowed. The minimum value for PRC is 2; values

of 0 and 1 are not allowed. For a value of N in the SBR field, the value of the PRC field

will be set to N+1.

Only 1 OCPU per 1+1

A check in the Only 1 OCPU per 1+1 checkbox activates the 1 OCPU per 1+1 protection

feature. A blank in this field is the default, indicating the feature is not active.

Traffic Engineering

The Traffic Engineering section sets the network optimization options.

Enhanced optimization nominal

The Enhanced optimization nominal checkbox prevents creating a design linked to the

order of the computed services. By default, services are computed in the order of

definition. The use of this field enhances the RWA optimization by performing a global

optimization, canceling the influence of service treating order, and reaching a

pseudo-optimal solution.

Add A/D Block instead of re-coloring

The Add A/D Block instead of re-coloring checkbox indicates that instead of

re-colorization, Add/Drop blocks should be used.

Design Inputs

Section 8: Design Parameters

Traffic Setting Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-123

By default ONDP optimizes the network in order to reduce the cost and to minimize the

number of A/D blocks. As a consequence re-coloring is used for regeneration. If the user

checks the Add A/D Block instead of re-coloring check box, it constrains the color when

regeneration occurs. In this case, the cost to the network could be higher.

Max link filling ratio for nominal

The Max link filling ratio for nominal field affects the filling of each fiber in the network

for the nominal path. The default value is 1.0 or 100%. This value allows the routing

engine to fill up the fiber to maximum capacity (100%). The maximum capacity is set in

the Channel Setting Design Parameters window using the field next to the TrxA or TrxB

fields. The Max link filling ratio for nominal field acts as an upper limit for the load

balancing.

Example: The Max link filling ratio for nominal is 0.5 and the maximum number of

channels is set at 80. These settings mean that for the nominal path, it is not possible to

have more than 40 channels. Anything above 40, is required to take another path.

Load balancing weight

The Load balancing weight field specifies the load balancing in the network. A value of

0, prevents any load balancing. The higher the value the more widely the channels will be

spread over the network.

Design Inputs

Section 8: Design Parameters

Traffic Setting Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-124 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Set Design Parameters

When to use

Use this task to set network design parameters.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Design Parameters” (p. 4-115)

• “WDM Layer Design Parameters” (p. 4-117)

• “Traffic Setting Design Parameters” (p. 4-122)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to set the design parameters.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Topology Map Main menu, follow this path:

Inputs > Set Design Parameters

Result: The Set Design Parameters window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Set Design Parameters window, select the appropriate design parameter tab and

change the design parameters as required.

Result: The design parameters are set.

Design Inputs

Section 8: Design Parameters

Set Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

4-125

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Design Inputs Set Design Parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-126 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

5 5Run the Network Design

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides information on how to run the network design. This chapter also

provides information on warning messages generated during the network design.

Contents

The Network Design 5-2

Run the Full Network Design 5-4

Run Partial Network Designs for Links 5-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

5-1

The Network Design

Network Design

After creating the sites, links/spans, relations/services, and setting the design parameters,

the design analysis engine can be run to determine if the design is valid.

Full network design

ONDP provides the following types of design for network analysis. For information on

how to run the type of full design, see “Run the Full Network Design” (p. 5-4).

• Run Full Design [Links+Traffic] - Runs the full design and produces a network

according to the specified design elements and network design configuration

parameters. Use this shortcut to run a links design followed by a traffic design.

• Run Full Links Design only - Run a partial design to optimize optical parameters such

as amplifier position, dispersion mapping optimization, and amplifier type settings

optimization.

• Run Full Traffic Design only - Run a partial design to resolve the traffic matrix.

Performs a routing, a wavelength allocation, a dimensioning, and a shelf computation.

This operation is only possible if a links design has been previously triggered.

Partial network design for links

ONDP provides an option for partial network design analysis for links.

Design Selected Links

The Design Selected Links option allows the user to run the links design analysis for

selected links only. This option runs all of the links design steps for the selected links.

Links Design Steps

The following lists the steps in the links design that is run on links.

• Optimize Short Spans - for simple spans without amplifiers, this design step places

throughputs between spans instead of LOFA with an in-line attenuator.

• Optimize Eq Sites Position - when too many spans are in a link, the Optimize Eq

Sites Position design step places equalization sites according to the performance of

the .

• Optimize Chromatic Dispersion - this links design step corrects the dispersion of

wavelengths between nodes.

• Optimize Amplifiers - this links design step chooses the amplifier type and output

power.

Run the Network Design The Network Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-2 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Run Full Design icon color

The Run Full Design toolbar icon is colored to indicate the status of the network design.

Table 5-1 Run Full Design icon coloration

Icon color Description

Red

Design is to be confirmed. At least one critical

error exists.

Orange

Line design has been completed. At lease one

critical error exists.

Green

Full design has been completed successfully.

Event messages may exist.

Blue Full design has been completed with warnings.

Network Design Error Messages

If errors are detected while running the network design an Errors List report automatically

is displayed. The report provides information about warning messages and errors

generated during the network design. This report can also be displayed by selecting the

Show Errors Report option from the Results command on the Main menu. For more

information about this report, see “Show Errors Report” (p. 6-35).

Run the Network Design The Network Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

5-3

Run the Full Network Design

When to use

Use this task to run the full network design.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “The Network Design” (p. 5-2)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to run a full network design.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 After completing the network design, do one of the following:

• From the Topology Map Main menu, select Design > Run Full Design [Links +

Traffic]

• From the Topology Map Main menu, select Design > Run Full Links Design Only

• From the Topology Map Main menu, select Design > Run Full Traffic Design Only

• From the Topology Map toolbar, select the Run Full Design icon.

Result: The selected full network design is run. A series of status windows are

displayed as the design calculation is in progress. Once the design calculation is

complete the Run Full Design icon changes color. For more information, see “Run

Full Design icon color” (p. 5-3).

Run the Network Design Run the Full Network Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-4 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Run Partial Network Designs for Links

When to use

Use this task to run partial network design analysis for links.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “The Network Design” (p. 5-2)

• “Partial network design for links” (p. 5-2)

Before you begin

This task does not have any preconditions.

Task

Complete the following steps to run a partial network design analysis for links.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 To run a partial network design analysis do one of the following:

• From the Topology Map, right click the link and select Design Link from the Link

pop-up menu.

• From the Edit Spans window Links table, select one or more links in the table and

right click in the table. From the Links pop-up menu, select Design Selected Links.

Result: The partial network design analysis is run.

Run the Network Design Run Partial Network Designs for Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

5-5

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Run the Network Design Run Partial Network Designs for Links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-6 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6 6Design Results

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides information on how to retrieve and view network design result and

reports.

Contents

Design Results and Reports 6-2

Show/Tune Selected Links Design 6-3

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics 6-6

Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria 6-15

Show Graphical Statistics 6-17

Show Network Statistics 6-21

Show Failures Report 6-24

Show GMRE Audit Logs 6-31

Show Traffic Design Logs 6-34

Show Errors Report 6-35

Show Bill of Material 6-37

Show Bill of Material (multi-step) 6-38

Show Sites/Part List 6-39

Show Equipment View 6-40

Show Line View 6-41

Export Design Results Excel Report 6-45

Export BoM 6-71

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-1

Design Results and Reports

Design Results

ONDP provides different methods to view and adjust the results of the network design.

The list of design results and reports includes the following:

• “Show/Tune Selected Links Design ” (p. 6-3)

• “Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics” (p. 6-6)

• “Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria” (p. 6-15)

• “Show Graphical Statistics” (p. 6-17)

• “Show Network Statistics” (p. 6-21)

• “Show Failures Report” (p. 6-24)

• “Show GMRE Audit Logs” (p. 6-31)

• “Show Bill of Material” (p. 6-37)

• “Show Bill of Material (multi-step)” (p. 6-38)

• “Show Sites/Part List” (p. 6-39)

• “Show Traffic Design Logs” (p. 6-34)

• “Show Errors Report” (p. 6-35)

• “Show Equipment View” (p. 6-40)

• “Show Line View” (p. 6-41)

• “Export Design Results Excel Report” (p. 6-45)

• “Export BoM” (p. 6-71)

Design Results Design Results and Reports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-2 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Show/Tune Selected Links Design

Description

The Show/Tune Selected Links Design option displays the Edit route optical design

window which displays the results of a selected link design or a set of contiguous links (A

to B and B to A). The option also allows the user to change link parameters by clicking

any parameter and entering information in the field.

Access

To access the Edit route optical design window from the Topology Map do the following:

• Click a link or links on the Map

• Right click the link to display the link pop-up menu.

• Select Show/Tune Design Results. The Edit route optical design window is displayed.

To access the Edit route optical design window from the Edit Spans window, do the

following:

• Select a link or links in the Links table

• Right click the Links table to display the Links pop-up menu

• From the Links pop-up menu, select Show/Tune Links Design Results. The Edit route

optical design window is displayed.

To access the Edit route optical design window from the Main menu, do the following:

• Select a link or links on the Map

• From the Main menu, select Reports > Show/Tune Selected Links Design. The Edit

route optical design window is displayed.

Design Results Show/Tune Selected Links Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-3

Display

Optical design parameters

Editable optical design parameters are those with a plus sign (+) appearing before the

parameter title. These parameters can be edited by double clicking the field and entering

the value in the Edit route optical design window. To change a field, press the Tab key or

click in a different field. Additional entry methods are indicated in the following tables.

Warning: Interaction occurs between the Edit route optical design window and the Edit

Spans window. Changing a parameter in one window can affect the parameters in the

other. For example, if the Spans Count is changed in the Links table, the parameters for

the optical design are redefined in the Edit route optical design window.

Note: In the Edit route optical design window, preamplifiers and boosters are highlighted

in gray.

Table 6-1 Optical design parameters

Parameter Definition

Site Identifies site

Ampli type Identifies the type of amplifier

Output Power [dBm] Identifies the output power

FOA Inter Amplis [dB] Indicates Fixed Optical Attenuator when a

double LOFA configuration is used

DCU Family Identifies the DCU family

DCU Module Identifies the DCU module

Figure 6-1 Edit route optical design window

Design Results Show/Tune Selected Links Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-4 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 6-1 Optical design parameters (continued)

Parameter Definition

Ampli type (2) Identifies the type of amplifier in case of

double amplifier

Output Power (2) Identifies the output power in case of double

amplifier

BOL Loss dB Identifies the Beginning of Life loss

BOL/EOL Loss Margin Beginning of Life/End of Life loss margin

Length [km] Sets the length

Fiber Type Identifies the type of fiber

Att before Fib [dB] Identifies attenuation before fiber

Design Results Show/Tune Selected Links Design

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-5

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

Description

The Show Select Links Physical Diagnostics option displays link physical diagnostic

information in three windows:

• Figure 6-2, “Path Feasibility window” (p. 6-7) - illustrates the signal power (dB) over

distance (km), indicating the path feasibility of a selected link or a set of contiguous

links. For mixed 10 G/40 G, services, a checkbox enables both types of service to

display at once, or the user can select one type of service to display.

• Figure 6-4, “Dispersion Map window” (p. 6-9) - depicts the dispersion of wavelengths

(DCU mapping) of a selected link or a set of contiguous links

• Figure 6-3, “Optical design window” (p. 6-8) - provides physical diagnostics

capabilities by displaying the optical design in graphic form of a selected link or a set

of contiguous links

The Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics window has capabilities such as Zoom In,

Zoom Out, Print, and Auto Range capabilities. To perform these actions, right click in the

window and select an action from the pop-up menu. For more information see “Show

Selected Links Physical Diagnostics Pop-up Menu” (p. 6-9).

Access

To access the physical diagnostics windows from the Topology Map do the following:

• Select a link or links on the Map

• Right click the link to display the link pop-up menu.

• Select Show Physical Diagnostics. The Path Feasibility window is displayed.

• To display one of the other physical diagnostics windows, select from the Graph field

list.

To access the physical diagnostics windows from the Edit Spans window, do the

following:

• Select a link or links in the Links table

• Right click the Links table to display the Links pop-up menu

• From the Links pop-up menu, select Show Physical Diagnostics. The Path Feasibility

window is displayed.

• To display one of the other physical diagnostics windows, select from the Graph field

list.

Design Results Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-6 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

To access the physical diagnostics windows from the Main menu, do the following:

• Select a link or links on the Map

• From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics.

The Path Feasibility window is displayed.

• To display one of the other physical diagnostics windows, select from the Graph field

list.

Display

Figure 6-2 Path Feasibility window

Design Results Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-7

Figure 6-3 Optical design window

Design Results Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-8 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics Pop-up Menu

The Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics windows contain a pop-up menu that offer

additional actions to configure the display of the results. To access the pop-up menu, right

click in any of the Selected Links Physical Diagnostics windows

Figure 6-4 Dispersion Map window

Design Results Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-9

The following table describes the options in the Show Selected Links Physical

Diagnostics pop-up menu.

Option Description

Properties Opens the Chart Properties window, which

allows the user to configure the appearance of

the displayed information. For more

information, see “Chart Properties window”

(p. 6-11)

Save as... Opens the Save window to save the Show

Selected Links Physical Diagnostics results to

a designated file name and location.

Print... Opens the Page Setup window to configure

printer options and print the Show Selected

Links Physical Diagnostics results

Zoom In Open the Zoom In pop-up menu, which allows

the display to expand to present a detailed

view of the physical diagnostics. Possible

Zoom In options are: Both Axes, Domain Axis

or Range Axis.

Zoom Out Opens the Zoom Out pop-up menu, which

allows the display to contract to present a

wider view of the physical diagnostics.

Possible Zoom Out options are: Both Axes,

Domain Axis or Range Axis.

Figure 6-5 Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics pop-up menu

Design Results Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-10 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Option Description

Auto Range Opens the Auto Range pop-up menu, which

allows the display to contract or expand by

clicking in the window and dragging the

cursor to present the desired view of the

physical diagnostics. Possible Auto Range

options are: Both Axes, Domain Axis or Range

Axis.

Chart Properties window

The Chart Properties window enables the user to configure the appearance of the Show

Selected Links Physical Diagnostics results.

The Chart Properties window contains the following tabs:

• Figure 6-6, “Chart Properties window - Title tab” (p. 6-12) - configure the text and

font properties of the selected link or set of contiguous links in the Show Selected

Links Physical Diagnostics results windows.

• Figure 6-7, “Chart Properties window - Plot tab” (p. 6-13) - configure the color and

font properties of the labels, lines, axis, and background in the Show Selected Links

Physical Diagnostics results windows.

• Figure 6-8, “Chart Properties window - Other tab” (p. 6-14) - configure additional

color and font properties of the Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics results

windows.

Design Results Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-11

Figure 6-6 Chart Properties window - Title tab

Design Results Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-12 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 6-7 Chart Properties window - Plot tab

Design Results Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-13

Figure 6-8 Chart Properties window - Other tab

Design Results Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-14 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria

Description

The Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria option on the Results menu

displays a window which graphically depicts the optical feasibility of a link between

nodes. The Fast Feasibility Criteria (FFC) depicted in the window has update capabilities.

For example, if the Loss parameter is changed, the optical margin is updated dynamically.

When the FFC is positive, the signal can travel from the source to the destination with a

margin indicated by the value of the FFC. When the FFC value is negative, the signal

cannot travel from the source to the destination without regeneration. In addition, the

absolute value of the FFC provides an indication of when the regeneration can be

removed. For example, an FFC value of –0.5 dB indicates regeneration removal is

possible soon, while an FFC value of –2 dB indicates regeneration removal is not possible

at all.

Access

The following are the methods to display the Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria.

1. From the Topology Map do the following:

• Right click a link to display the Link pop-up menu.

• Select Show Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria. The FFC is displayed.

2. From the Topology Map do the following:

• From the Icon bar, click the Optical Margin Tool icon.

• Mouse over any link on the map. The FFC is displayed.

3. From the Edit Spans window, do the following:

• Double click a link to display the Edit Spans window

• Right click the Links table to display the Links table pop-up menu

• From the Links pop-up menu, select Show Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria.

The FFC is displayed.

4. From the Main menu, do the following:

• Select a link or links on the Map

• From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Selected Links Real Time Fast

Feasibility Criteria. The FFC is displayed.

Design Results Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-15

Display

Figure 6-9 Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria – 10G

Figure 6-10 Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria – Mixed 10G/40G

Design Results Show Selected Links Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-16 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Show Graphical Statistics

Description

The Show Graphical Statistics report option displays the design results on the Topology

Map in a graphical display. The display changes based on the selection in the Statistics

window.

The Statistics window

The Statistics window allows various design statistics to display graphically on the

Topology Map for both Sites and Links.

For Sites, the following graphical design statistics are displayed:

• none

• Inputs

– Access Load

– Add Drop

• Nominal Outputs

– Transit OEO+OOO

– Transit OOO

– Transit OEO (3R+Re-color)

- Transit OEO (3R)

- Transit OEO (Re-color)

• Restoration Outputs

– Transit OEO (Restoration)

For Links, the following graphical design statistics are displayed:

• none

• Inputs

– Total Length

– Total Loss

– Spans Count

– Administrative Cost

• Nominal Outputs

– TrxA Optical Margin

– TrxA Non Feasible Optical Section

– Channels Count

• Restoration Outputs

– Channels Count

Design Results Show Graphical Statistics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-17

Access

The following are the methods to display Graphical Statistics:

1. From the Main menu, do the following:

• Select Reports > Show Graphical Statistics.

• From the Statistics window, select the option button for the statistic you wish to

display graphically.

2. From the Topology Map, do the following:

• From the Icon Bar, click the Show Graphical Statistic icon.

• From the Statistics window, select the option button for the statistic you wish to

display graphically.

The Slide bar on the right side of the Statistics window increases or decreases graphically

on the Topology map the size of the currently selected statistic. As more statistics are

displayed on the Map, the statistical display can be increased or decreased so the various

graphics are easier to read.

Design Results Show Graphical Statistics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-18 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Display

The following are examples of the graphical display of selected statistics.

Figure 6-11 Spans Count graphical statistics example

Design Results Show Graphical Statistics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-19

Figure 6-12 Access Load graphical statistics example

Design Results Show Graphical Statistics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-20 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Show Network Statistics

Description

The Show Network Statistics report option displays, for each step in the incremental

design, high level statistical values of the network design optimization, which provide the

user a global view of the network design. The report is presented in two screens:

• General Statistics - displays network statistics such as:

– number of failed connections

– number allocated optical bands

– fiber link load

– failure scenario, including number of dead and restored services

– number of NEs with 3R resources

• Statistics on Step - displays the following statistics on NEs and OMSs in the network

for each step in the incremental design

– Number of Nodes

– Number on OMSs

– Average Degree

– Maximum Degree

– Minimum Degree

Access

To access the Network Statistics report do the following:

• From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Network Statistics

• The Network Statistics report is displayed.

Design Results Show Network Statistics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-21

Display

Figure 6-13 Network Statistics report - General Statistics tab

Design Results Show Network Statistics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-22 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 6-14 Network Statistics report - Statistics on Step tab

Design Results Show Network Statistics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-23

Show Failures Report

Description

The Show Failures Report report option indicates the effect of failures on the network.

This report has three tabs:

• Services – shows failure effects from a service point of view

• Scenarios – shows failure effects from a scenario point of view

• Filter – allows the user to select specific OMS, nodes, or SRGs to analyze for

failures.

By right-clicking on different fields in each tab, pop-up menus list the options available

for each field in the report. These pop-up menus provide the ability to display the

restoration paths, as well as the nominal and restoration paths for each scenario or each

service. Additionally, the user can highlight and navigate between the related objects, the

Topology map and the Edit Services window.

Summary button

The Summary button of each service or scenario provides a visual descriptive summary

for that service or scenario. It appears as a colored button containing three sections

separated by a slash (/) that indicate the status of the service or scenario, as appears in the

following figure:

The sections in the Summary button for services are as follows: xd/ymd/zr

• xd - the number (x) of services that are down (d)

• ymd - the number (y) of services restored with at least one partial disjointness rule

violation for at least one service (most disjointness - md)

• zr - the number (z) of services restored (r) without any partial disjointness rule

violation

The sections in the Summary button for scenarios are as follows: xd/ymd/zr

• xd - the number (x) of scenarios that are down (d)

• ymd - the number (y) of scenarios restored with at least one partial disjointness rule

violation (most disjointness - md)

• zr - the number (z) of scenarios restored (r) without any partial disjointness rule

violation

Figure 6-15 Service Summary button

Design Results Show Failures Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-24 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Tab color description

The colors displayed on Services tab indicate the following conditions:

• Green - for all involved failures, the service is Restored without any partial

disjointness rule violation

• Red - the service is down for at least one involved failure

• Blue - for all involved failures, the service is Restored with at least one partial

disjointness rule violation

The colors displayed on Scenarios tab indicate the following conditions:

• Green - for all involved services, the failure scenario induces successful restoration

without any partial disjointness rule violation

• Red - at least one service is down for that failure scenario

• Blue - for all involved services, the failure scenario induces at least one Restoration

with at least one partial disjointness rule violation (but no service is down for that

failure scenario)

Access

To access the Failures Report do the following:

• From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Failures Report

• The Failures Report window is displayed. The Services tab is the default display.

Display

The Failures Report contains three tabs: Services, Scenarios, and Filter.

Failures Report, Services tab

The Services tab of the Show Failures Report lists failures on services in a hierarchical

tree. Right-click on each level in the tree to display a pop-up menu of available

commands for that level. For a list of commands descriptions, see “Failures Report

pop-up menus commands” (p. 6-29).

Design Results Show Failures Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-25

Services Summary icon - the top icon of the hierarchical tree in the Services tab provides

a visual descriptive summary of services. The icon appears as a colored button followed

by three section separated by a slash (/), The sections in the icon appear as follows:

ad/bmd/cr, where

• ad - the number (a) of services that are down

• bmd - the number (b) of services that are Restored with at least one partial

disjointness rule violation for at least one service

• cr - the number (c) of services that are Restored without any partial disjointness rule

violation

Figure 6-16 Failures Report, Services tab

Design Results Show Failures Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-26 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Services Summary icon colors - the colors displayed in the top icon of the hierarchical

tree in the Services tab indicate the following conditions

• Green - all services are Restored without any partial disjointness rule violation

• Red - at least one service is Down

• Blue - all services are Restored with at least one partial disjointness rule violation for

at least one service

Failures Report, Scenarios tab

The Scenaros tab of the Show Failures Report lists failures on services from a failure

scenario perspective in a hierarchical tree. Right-click on each level in the tree to display

a pop-up menu of available commands for that level. For a list of commands descriptions,

see “Failures Report pop-up menus commands” (p. 6-29).

Figure 6-17 Failures Report, Scenarios tab

Design Results Show Failures Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-27

Scenarios Summary icon - the top icon of the hierarchical tree in the Scenarios tab

provides a visual descriptive summary of failure scenarios. The icon appears as a colored

button followed by three section separated by a slash (/), The sections in the icon appear

as follows: ad/bmd/cr, where

• ad - the number (a) of failure scenarios that are down

• bmd - the number (b) of failure scenarios that are Restored with at least one partial

disjointness rule violation for at least one service

• cr - the number (c) of failure scenarios that induce successful Restoration without any

partial disjointness rule violation

Scenarios Summary icon colors - the colors displayed in the top icon of the hierarchical

tree in the Services tab indicate the following conditions

• Green - all services are Restored without any partial disjointness rule violation

• Red - at least one service is Down

• Blue - all services are Restored with at least one partial disjointness rule violation for

at least one service

Failures Report, Filter tab

The Filter tab of the Failures Report allows the failures analysis to be filtered for specific

resources. To include or exclude resources, highlight the resource(s) and click the right or

left arrow button.

Design Results Show Failures Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-28 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Failures Report pop-up menus commands

The following table describe the commands that are appear in the various pop-up menus

in the Failures Report. The commands that display are specific to the position in the

hierarchical tree. All commands do not appear in all pop-up menus. To display the pop-up

menu, right click in the tree.

Command Description

Expand All Expand the tree to display all information to the

lowest level

Collapse All Collapse the tree to the highest level of

information

Highlight All Nominal on Map Highlight all the nominal services on the

Topology Map

Figure 6-18 Failures Report, Filter tab

Design Results Show Failures Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-29

Command Description

Highlight Nominal on Map Highlight the specific nominal services on the

Topology Map

Highlight in Table Open the Edit Service window and display the

highlighted service(s) in the table

Highlight All Restored on Map Highlight all restored services on the Topology

Map

Highlight Restored on Map Highlight the specific restored services on the

Topology Map

Highlight Nominal + Restored on Map Highlight the specific nominal and restored

services on the Topology Map

Navigate to From the Services tab, navigate from the specific

service to the scenario in the Scenario tab. From

the Scenario tab, navigate from the scenario to

the service in the Services tab.

Highlight All on Map Highlight all failed resources on the Topology

Map.

Highlight on Map Highlight the specific failed resources on the

Topology Map.

Design Results Show Failures Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-30 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Show GMRE Audit Logs

Description

The GMRE Audit Logs report displays the results of the restoration and protection

analysis/failure analysis.

Access

To access the GMRE Audit Logs report do one of the following:

• From the Main menu, select Tools > GMRE Simulator. The report is displayed

• From the Main menu, select Reports > Show GMRE Audit Logs

Display

The information reported on the GMRE Audit Logs report is determined by the type of

scenario in which the GMRE Simulator used. The following links proved detailed

information on the GMRE Simulator use case scenarios.

• “GMRE Simulator use case 1 — determine success of GMPLS dimensioning”

(p. 7-9)

• “GMRE Simulator use case 2 — evaluate tolerance of GMPLS restoration

dimensioning” (p. 7-10)

Display

The information reported on the GMRE Audit Logs report is determined by the type of

scenario in which the GMRE Simulator is used. The following sections proved detailed

information on the GMRE Simulator use case scenarios and the information that is

displayed on the GMRE Audit Logs reports for each use case.

GMRE Simulator — determine success of GMPLS dimensioning

In this use case, failure scenarios are simulated and the results allow the user to determine

if it is possible to restore successfully or if there are errors in the GMPLS dimensioning.

For more information, see “GMRE Simulator use case 1 — determine success of GMPLS

dimensioning” (p. 7-9).

Design Results Show GMRE Audit Logs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-31

GMRE Audit Logs report — evaluate tolerance of GMPLS restoration dimensioning

In this use case, the GMRE simulator is used to evaluate the tolerance of GMPLS

restoration dimensioning. For more information, see “GMRE Simulator use case 2 —

evaluate tolerance of GMPLS restoration dimensioning” (p. 7-10).

Figure 6-19 GMRE Audit Logs report — determining success of GMPLS dimensioning

Design Results Show GMRE Audit Logs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-32 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 6-20 GMRE Audit Logs report — evaluate tolerance of GMPLS restoration

dimensioning

Design Results Show GMRE Audit Logs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-33

Show Traffic Design Logs

Description

The Show Traffic Design Logs report option displays logs on the network design.

Access

To access the Traffic design logs report do the following:

• From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Traffic Design Logs

• The Traffic design logs report is displayed.

Display

Figure 6-21 Traffic design logs report

Design Results Show Traffic Design Logs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-34 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Show Errors Report

Description

The Show Errors Report option produces the List Errors report, which provides

information about warning messages and errors generated while running the network

design. These errors are reported for either network calculation or optical line design

errors.

Access

The List Errors report is displayed in the following ways:

• From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Errors Report

• If errors occur when running the network design, the report is displayed automatically.

For more information on how to run the network design, see Chapter 5, “ Run the

Network Design”.

Display

Figure 6-22 List Errors report

Design Results Show Errors Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-35

Errors list

The following is a list of possible errors reported while running the network design.

Table 6-2 List of reported network design errors

General Information Detailed

Information

Type Domain Severity

Network optimization

failed

No physical path found Design Network Critical

Network optimization

failed

Wavelength allocation

failed

Design Network Critical

Network optimization

failed

Disjoint path not found Design Network Critical

Network optimization

failed

Constraint not fulfilled Design Network Critical

Network optimization

failed

Service path

reservation failed

Design Network Critical

Network optimization

failed

Error in service

constraint loading

Design Network Critical

Optical line

optimization failed

Span too short Design Optical line Critical

Optical line

optimization failed

Span too long Design Optical line Critical

Optical line

optimization failed

Equipment not

recognized

Design Optical line Critical

SRG Violation At least one restoration

scenario cannot fulfill

SRG constraints for

service

Network Design Warning

Disjointness violation

on links / nodes

Nominal paths partial

disjointness between

services S1 and S2

Network Design Warning

Disjointness violation

on links / nodes

Nominal paths partial

disjointness between

working and protecting

paths

Network Design Warning

Design Results Show Errors Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-36 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Show Bill of Material

Description

The Show Bill of Material report option displays the list of materials needed to construct

the network.

Access

To access the Bill of Materials report do the following:

• From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Bill of Material

• The Bill of Material report is displayed.

Display

Figure 6-23 Bill of Material report

Design Results Show Bill of Material

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-37

Show Bill of Material (multi-step)

Description

The Show Bill of Material (multi-step) report option displays the list of materials needed

to construct the network for each step in the incremental design, for a series of steps in the

incremental design, or for the whole design.

The report provides Start step and End step sliders. When the two sliders have the same

value the entire Bill of Material is displayed for the chosen step. When the values of the

sliders are different, the Bill of Material for the chosen End step, beginning from the

chosen Start step is displayed.

Access

To access the Incremental Bill of Material report do the following:

• From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Bill of Material (multi-step)

• The Incremental Bill of Material report is displayed.

Display

Figure 6-24 Incremental Bill of Material report

Design Results Show Bill of Material (multi-step)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-38 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Show Sites/Part List

Description

The Show Sites/Part List report option displays the list of boards for each NE with

location and optical parameters.

Access

The following are methods to display the Sites/Part List

1. From the Main menu, select Reports > Show Sites/Part List

2. From the Topology Map, do the following:

• Right-click a Site

• From the Site pop-up menu, select Show Part List

Display

Figure 6-25 Part List report

Design Results Show Sites/Part List

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-39

Show Equipment View

Description

The Show Equipment View option displays the view of the specific equipment. Shelf

modifications are supported through this window. For more information on shelf

modifications, see Chapter 8, “Modifications for ONDP Design”.

Access

To display the Equipment View do the following:

• From the Topology Map, click a site to display the Site pop-up menu.

• From the Site pop-up menu, select Show Equipment View.

• To toggle to the Schematic View, select Display from the menu, and check/uncheck

the Schematic View box.

Display

Figure 6-26 Edit Equipments report

Design Results Show Equipment View

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-40 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Show Line View

Description

The Show Line View options display the path followed by all wavelengths supported by

the link.

The report permits the following views:

• Show Line View (full spectrum) - displays the channels carried by the selected link

in their respective wavelength/frequency order in the optical spectrum. This view

could lead to a complex graphical display.

• Show Line View (optimized) - displays the channels in a reordered way so that the

graphical display is optimally simplified.

Both the Show Line View (full spectrum) and the Show Line View (optimized) option

provides the following graphical display options:

• Display “ITU Id”

• Display “Frequency”

• Display “Wavelength”

• Display “ITU Id/Frequencies”

• Display “ITU Id/Wavelength”

• Display “ITU Id/Protection”

• Display “ITU Id/Trib”

• Display “ITU Id/Location”

• Display “ITU Id/WDM Format”

• Display “ITU Id/Service Label”

Access

To display the Line View do the following:

• From the Topology Map, right click a link to display the Link pop-up menu.

• Select either Show Line View (full spectrum) or Show Line View (optimized)

• To change the information displayed, select Display from the main menu and select

the option button of the desired view from the drop-down menu, as shown in Figure

6-27, “Show Line View Display options” (p. 6-42)..

Design Results Show Line View

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-41

Display the Ports View window

From the Line View window do the following to access the Ports View window.

• From the Line View window, click the desired channel for which to display the Ports

View window. The rest of the window will be greyed out and the Open command on

the Main menu will become active.

• From the Line View Main menu, select Open.

• From the Open menu, select either Source Port Window to open the Ports View

window for the source port, or Destin Port Window to open the Port View window

for the destination port. The Ports View window is displayed, if the channel

transmission is made through a concentrator. For more information on the Ports View

window, see “Ports View window” (p. 8-16).

Figure 6-27 Show Line View Display options

Design Results Show Line View

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-42 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Show Line View display

Figure 6-28 Line View (full spectrum) report

Design Results Show Line View

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-43

Figure 6-29 Line View (optimized) report

Design Results Show Line View

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-44 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Export Design Results Excel Report

Description

The Export Design Results Excel Report option produces a Network Descriptions Table

file in Excel format which can be used for manual commissioning. The Excel Export

Filtering window allows the user to select the specific data to export to the Network

Design Table.

Additionally, the file gathers all the network design input and output results such as

network topology, traffic matrix, service route information (nominal and restored), optical

margin per service and line design information. All the necessary network data (input &

output) are included in a unique file.

Access

To export the file, do the following:

• From the Main menu, select Reports > Export Design Results Excel Report

Figure 6-30 Excel Export Filtering window

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-45

Note: If a full design has not been run, a Warning box displays the message

Network inputs have been modified. You need to rerun a full

design. If you decide to continue there will be no guarantee

on the output. Click Continue.

Result: The Excel Export Filtering window is displayed.

• Select the data to be exported and click Apply.

Result: The Export to Excel window is displayed.

• Navigate to the folder in which the NDT will be saved, and click Save.

Result: The report file is saved in .xls format in the selected folder.

Display

The Export Design Results report produces an Excel file, which presents the Network

Descriptions Table in an Excel spreadsheet. The follow table lists the tabs in the

spreadsheet.

Export Design Results tab title Description

Figure 6-31, “Descriptive Sheet tab”

(p. 6-48)

Displays high level information describing the

network

Figure 6-32, “Map tab” (p. 6-49) Displays the network as seen on the Topology

Map

Figure 6-33, “Sites tab” (p. 6-50) Displays a list of the sites and the site parameters

Figure 6-34, “Links tab” (p. 6-51) Displays a list of the links and link parameters.

This tab also contains links to spans details tabs.

Figure 6-35, “Relations tab” (p. 6-52) Displays a list of the relations and relation

parameters. This tab also contains links to

services details tabs

Figure 6-36, “BOM tab” (p. 6-53) Displays a Bill of Materials report for the

network

Figure 6-37, “Part List Sites tab” (p. 6-54) Displays a list of sites with links to tabs which

contain Part Lists for each site.

Figure 6-38, “Design Service Summary

tab” (p. 6-55)

Displays a list of parameters summarizing the

service design result

Figure 6-39, “Restoration tab” (p. 6-56) Displays restoration information for services

Figure 6-40, “Graph Statistics tab”

(p. 6-57)

Displays a Graphical Statistics report in

spreadsheet format

Figure 6-47, “Network Design Logs tab”

(p. 6-64)

Displays log information on the network design

Figure 6-41, “Inter-NE Links, LT and Node

tab” (p. 6-58)

Displays optical data of links and nodes

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-46 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Export Design Results tab title Description

Figure 6-42, “NE Parameters tab” (p. 6-59) Displays a listing of the NE parameters

Figure 6-43, “Subsets tab” (p. 6-60) Displays information about Subsets

Figure 6-44, “GMPLS Link Optical

Parameters tab” (p. 6-61)

Displays the GMPLS attributes for each OMS

link in the network

Figure 6-45, “GMPLS AddDropType per

Site” (p. 6-62)

Displays all the possible AddDropType

references that could be used in the current

network, considering if the 100 G Coherent

format is or is not forecast in the current network

design.

Figure 6-46, “SRG tab” (p. 6-63) Displays information about SRGs

Figure 6-47, “Network Design Logs tab”

(p. 6-64)

Displays the network design logs

Figure 6-48, “OSNR NLP tab” (p. 6-65) Displays OSNR NLP evolution along a service

path

Figure 6-49, “CD tab” (p. 6-66) Displays a chromatic dispersion report

Figure 6-50, “PL Site X tab” (p. 6-67) Displays a schematic view and a detailed part list

of the equipment. This tab contains a link to the

Part List Sites tab. There is a separate tab for each

site.

Figure 6-51, “SP Site-X Site-X tab”

(p. 6-68)

Displays the span information between two sites.

There is a separate tab for each link.

Figure 6-52, “Ser Site-X Site-X” (p. 6-69) Displays service information for each relation.

There is a separate tab for each relation.

Figure 6-53, “DSF Mask 2 Forghieri grids

tab” (p. 6-70)

Displays the frequency information for the DSF

mask 2 Forghieri grids

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-47

Figure 6-31 Descriptive Sheet tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-48 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 6-32 Map tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-49

Figure 6-33 Sites tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-50 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 6-34 Links tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-51

Figure 6-35 Relations tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-52 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 6-36 BOM tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-53

Figure 6-37 Part List Sites tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-54 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 6-38 Design Service Summary tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-55

Figure 6-39 Restoration tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-56 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 6-40 Graph Statistics tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-57

Figure 6-41 Inter-NE Links, LT and Node tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-58 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 6-42 NE Parameters tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-59

Figure 6-43 Subsets tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-60 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 6-44 GMPLS Link Optical Parameters tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-61

Figure 6-45 GMPLS AddDropType per Site

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-62 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 6-46 SRG tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-63

Figure 6-47 Network Design Logs tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-64 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 6-48 OSNR NLP tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-65

Figure 6-49 CD tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-66 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 6-50 PL Site X tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-67

Figure 6-51 SP Site-X Site-X tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-68 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Figure 6-52 Ser Site-X Site-X

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-69

Figure 6-53 DSF Mask 2 Forghieri grids tab

Design Results Export Design Results Excel Report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-70 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Export BoM

Description

The Export BoM produces output to the Comet software for automatic quotation based on

the BoM.

Access

To export the file, do the following:

• From the Main menu, select Reports > Export BoM

Note: If a full design has not been run, a Warning box displays the message

Network inputs have been modified. You need to rerun a full

design. If you decide to continue there will be no guarantee

on the output. Click Continue.

Result: A Warning box displays the message File nn_BoM.xls will be

created in the current folder. nn is the name of the current project.

• Click Continue.

Result: The ONDP dialog box is displayed.

• Navigate to the folder in which the Export BOM report will be saved.

• In the File Name field, rename the file if desired, or accept the default file name.

• Click Save.

Result: The Export BOM report is saved in .xls format in the selected folder.

Design Results Export BoM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

6-71

Display

Figure 6-54 Export BoM report

Design Results Export BoM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-72 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

7 7Network Analysis: Audit

and Upgrade

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides information on performing network analysis operations on an

existing network.

Contents

Network Configuration in ONDP 7-2

Network Analysis: Audit 7-4

Network Analysis: Upgrade 7-7

Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis — GMRE Simulator 7-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

7-1

Network Configuration in ONDP

Overview

ONDP users are able to perform network analysis functions such as auditing the network

and performing upgrades of network resources. These types of analysis can be performed

on a network created in ONDP or on an existing network that is loaded into ONDP.

The following is a list of types of network analysis ONDP is able to perform:

• Service path analysis – determine optical feasibility

• Restoration analysis – upon possible failures, determine the survivability of services

• Network statistics analysis – determine load requirements and identify bottlenecks or

weaknesses

• Perform scenarios for specific failures or network changes (upgrade)

Methods to create and configure a network

The following are the methods of creating and configuring a network in ONDP.

• “Full manual network creation” (p. 7-2) – using the design inputs described in this

guide, manually create a network from scratch by adding all the design elements and

setting all the parameters. The network created is saved in ONDP as a .ondp file.

• “Semi-auto network creation” (p. 7-3) – load and use a previously created .ondp file

and manually update and fine tune network parameters. For more information, see

“Open an Existing Project (.ondp file)” (p. 4-11).

Full manual network creation

Manually building a network from scratch requires that the user configure the following:

• “Network topology – create links and nodes” (p. 7-2)

• “NE configuration – set board type and shelf location” (p. 7-3)

• “Optical line configuration – set line tuning parameters” (p. 7-3)

• “Service demands – set spatial and spectral routes” (p. 7-3)

Network topology – create links and nodes

The user begins building a network by creating nodes and configuring the links between

the nodes. Parameters for the links are set at the link level as either input data or shown as

output results, which are computed by ONDP after the design is run.

For detailed information on creating nodes and configuring links, see Chapter 4, “Design

Inputs”. For detailed information on design outputs, see Chapter 6, “Design Results”

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade Network Configuration in ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-2 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

NE configuration – set board type and shelf location

Currently, board type and shelf location are not manually configured in ONDP. However,

after running the design, the software provides a standard shelf configuration, which is

used when upgrading a network. When doing an upgrade, new resources are identified to

distinguish them from existing resources. The user must rearrange the shelf configuration

for the existing boards to match the ones installed in the field, if they are different than

the standard shelf provided by ONDP.

Optical line configuration – set line tuning parameters

For the optical line configuration, the user sets the line tuning parameters for all optical

lines, using the Edit route optical design window. The following are examples of line

tuning parameters.

• LOFA type

• Output power

• DCU type

• DCU length

• Fixed Optical Attenuator

For information on the Edit route optical design window, see “Show/Tune Selected Links

Design ” (p. 6-3).

Service demands – set spatial and spectral routes

To set the service demand, the user sets the spatial and spectral route constraints, as well

as the 3R/recoloring points.

The explicit routing constraints are the full descriptions of the paths either at the

physical/link layer (spatial path) or the lambda layer (spectral path). Explicit routing

constraints are required for setting the manual service route during existing network

creation. Explicit routing constraints are also required for wavelength preference support

when creating a network or upgrading an existing network.

For information on explicit routing constraints, see “Relations and Services” (p. 4-57) and

“Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints” (p. 4-86).

For 3R points, the default nominal path is set by specifying on which NE in the path the

WDM channel needs to be regenerated.

Semi-auto network creation

In semi-auto network creation, a previously created .ondp file is loaded to manually

update and fine tune network parameters. For more information, see “Open an Existing

Project (.ondp file)” (p. 4-11). After the existing network file is loaded, the existing

network resources are set and fine tuned as described in “Full manual network creation”

(p. 7-2).

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade Network Configuration in ONDP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

7-3

Network Analysis: Audit

Audit overview

The audit process is controlled through the use of a design mode parameter set on the

topology resources (links and nodes) and path constraints set on services.

Set Computation Mode parameter

The design mode parameter that is used to define how the audit process is controlled on a

resource is the Computation Mode parameter, located on the Edit Spans window. The

possible values of the Computation Mode parameter are:

• Automatic – hardware and tuning are automatically set by ONDP. Elements with this

setting are designed automatically.

• Semi-Auto – hardware data is input by the user. Tuning is automatically set by ONDP.

• Manual – hardware and tuning data are input by the user and are used by ONDP as is.

No optimization or design is performed on elements with this setting. Only an audit

and checking process is performed

• NLP/OSNR – non-linear effects contribution of the OMS and noise contribution are set

by the user. The user only sets the feasibility parameters describing the full link.

Those parameters, including PMD, are sufficient to describe the link completely in

terms of optical feasibility. Hardware description and tuning information is not

necessary. The feasibility parameters are used for path feasibility assessment.

For more information on the Computation Mode parameter, see Table 4-10, “Links

parameters” (p. 4-39).

Set Service constraints

The explicit routing constraints are the full descriptions of the paths either at the

physical/link layer (spatial path) or the lambda layer (spectral path). Explicit routing

constraints or Routing and Wavelength Allocations (RWA) are required for setting the

manual service route during existing network creation. Explicit routing constraints are

also required for wavelength preference support when creating a network or upgrading an

existing network.

For information on explicit routing constraints, see information contained “Relations and

Services” (p. 4-57)and “Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints” (p. 4-86).

Design modes are also set to control if 3R resources can be added or not. Manual: the tool

can add 3R resources during restoration. Audit: The tool cannot add 3R resources during

restoration and must use available resources.

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade Network Analysis: Audit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-4 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Network audit and network design

The Computation Mode parameter and service constraints that have been set allow the

user to select which elements of the network are automatically designed and calculated by

ONDP, and which elements of the network are manually designed and set by the user. If

the user wants to perform a real network audit, then all resources are set to the Manual

or NLP/OSNR Computation Mode parameter and all services paths are fully described as

service constraints. If the user wants to perform an optimized or optimized network

audit, all resources are set to the Automatic or Semi-Auto Computation Mode and no

path constraints are defined in services.

Using the design modes and constraints, the user can define mixed configurations,

allowing parts of the network to be set manually and to be checked (audited) by ONDP,

and other parts of the network to be calculated and designed automatically.

Audit use case example

The following process describes a general network configuration audit use case scenario.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 User creates an existing network. For more information, see “Methods to create and

configure a network” (p. 7-2).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 User sets the design modes and constraints, determining which parts of the network are

set manually and checked (audited) by ONDP, and which parts of the network are

calculated and designed automatically. For more information, see “Set Computation

Mode parameter” (p. 7-4) and “Set Service constraints” (p. 7-4).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Once the network is configured the user can do one or more of the following:

• Start the full network design. For more information, see Chapter 5, “ Run the Network

Design”.

• Perform a failures audit by choosing a set of resources (link, NE or SRG) for failure

and running the GMRE Simulator option in the Tools menu. For more information see

“Edit a Failures Scope” (p. 4-112) and “Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis —

GMRE Simulator” (p. 7-9).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 ONDP reports the results of the design and/or audit in the following ways.

• Design status icons are indicated on the Topology Map. For more information, see

“Run Full Design icon color” (p. 5-3).

• Design and audit results are reported by ONDP. For more information, see Chapter 6,

“Design Results”.

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade Network Analysis: Audit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

7-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 As soon as SBR or PRC services are in the traffic matrix, restoration simulation is

triggered for the full network. At this point, the user can select links or nodes and simulate

failures of these resources to view the impacted services and potentially view the

restoration routes for the restorable services.

Audit features

The following is a list of Audit features that ONDP can provide:

• OMS line optimization – for OMS lines that have the Computation Mode set to

Semi-auto, an OMS line optimization can be performed.

• Audit optical feasibility for OMS lines – for OMS lines that have the Computation

Mode set to Manual, an Audit optical feasibility can be performed.

• Audit the optical feasibility of service routes – for OMS lines that have the

Computation Mode set to OSNR/NLP, an Audit optical feasibility of service routes can

be performed.

• Perform failure simulation for restorable services — using ONDP the user can

simulate failures for restorable services. For more information, see “Failures Scope”

(p. 4-105), “Show Failures Report” (p. 6-24), and “Show GMRE Audit Logs”

(p. 6-31).

• Analyze network load and highlight weaknesses — using the reports such as “Show

Graphical Statistics” (p. 6-17) and “Show Network Statistics” (p. 6-21), the user can

analyze the network load and spot weaknesses. The user can see all the results of the

analysis by generating the “Export Design Results Excel Report” (p. 6-45).

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade Network Analysis: Audit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-6 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Network Analysis: Upgrade

Upgrade overview

For an existing fully configured network, with set resources and fully configured routes,

the user is able perform an upgrade of the network. This is accomplished by adding new

resources or modifying existing resources. Resources that are added are tagged as “new”.

Additionally, existing resources can be selected to prevent inclusion in the upgrade.

Upgrade design

Prior to performing an upgrade, the user should define the upgrade design. There are three

possibly ways to design the upgrade:

• Constrained upgrade design – freeze the full existing network configuration and

perform the network optimization on added resources only. All resources should have

the Computation Mode parameter set to Manual.

• Unconstrained upgrade design – perform the network optimization on the full existing

network configuration as well as the added resources. All resources should have the

Computation Mode set to Auto or Semi-Auto.

• Mixed upgrade design – perform the network optimization on a set of resources

defined by the user. Resources included in the network optimization should have the

Computation Mode parameter set to Auto. Resources excluded from the network

optimization should have the Computation Mode parameter set to Manual, and have

spacial or spectral service constraints set.

Incremental upgrade steps

Incremental upgrade design steps provide a method of partitioning the network upgrade

into multiple user-defined steps. The user defines the topology and traffic matrix

information for each step. ONDP then performs the multiple step optimization and

provides upgrade results and BOM information on one specific step, a set of steps or for

all steps.

The upgrade design is divided into a series of numbered steps. The existing network

design is named Step 0 by default. The user determines the point in the upgrade design

when a new step in the incremental upgrade design is necessary. Successive steps in the

upgrade design are named Step 1, Step 2, and so on.

Upgrade design use case

Scenario:The user wants to upgrade an existing network by adding new links, nodes, and

services.

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade Network Analysis: Upgrade

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

7-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Create and configure existing network in ONDP. For more information, see “Methods to

create and configure a network” (p. 7-2).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Determine the type of upgrade design. For more information, see “Upgrade design”

(p. 7-7).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Update the network topology and traffic matrix by adding the new resources and services.

For more information, see “Network topology – create links and nodes” (p. 7-2).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If necessary, select a new granularity in the Set Design Parameters window. For more

information, see “Section 8: Design Parameters” (p. 4-114).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Exclude OMS lines from the upgrade by setting the Computation Mode to Manual.

Include OMS lines in the upgrade by setting the Computation Mode to Auto or

Semi-Auto. For more information, see “Set Computation Mode parameter” (p. 7-4).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Exclude services from upgrade reconfiguration by setting service path spectral and/or

spatial constraints. For more information, see “Set Service constraints” (p. 7-4).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Start the network design and check design results status. For more information, see

Chapter 5, “ Run the Network Design”.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Analyze upgrade results using reports. For more information, see Chapter 6, “Design

Results”.

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade Network Analysis: Upgrade

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-8 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis — GMRE Simulator

Overview

Failure analysis looks at the network design for an existing fully configured network with

set resources and fully configured routes, to determine the following:

• will all restorable services survive failures?

• are the current available resources sufficient?

• are there unused resources?

Using ONDP, it is possible to dimension a network to be compatible with restoration

services such as SBR and PRC. Using the GMRE simulator tool it is possible to not only

dimension a GMPLS network but to audit the dimensioning and evaluate the restoration

capability of the network.

The GMRE Simulator tool determines if the GMPLS dimensioning is successful and if

restoration services will work. The tool evaluates the resistance to failures of a network

that has not been GMPLS dimensioned.

There are two types of scenarios in which the GMRE Simulator is used.

• Failure scenarios are simulated and the results allow the user to determine if it is

possible to restore successfully or if there are errors in the GMPLS dimensioning.

• Stress the GMPLS network dimensioned for a certain number of failures with more

failures than are designed in the GMPLS dimensioning to determine how many failure

scenarios succeed.

GMRE Simulator use case 1 — determine success of GMPLS dimensioning

The following use case provides an example using the GMRE Simulator to guarantee the

success of the GMPLS dimensioning.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 User creates an existing GMPLS network dimensioning it with N failures. During the

GMPLS dimensioning phase, 3R NEs dedicated to restoration are dimensioned for both

Transponder A and B. After dimensioning phase, ONDP automatically populates the 3R

for Restoration Count [TrxA] and 3R for Restoration Count [TrxB] fields on the Edit

Sites window, indicating that 3R NEs have been positioned for restoration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 User defines the number of failures in the Set Design Parameters pages. The number of

failures is the same used in the GMPLS network dimensioning. For more information, see

“Section 8: Design Parameters” (p. 4-114).

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis — GMRE Simulator

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

7-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 User launches the GMRE Simulator to simulate failures in the network using this path:

Main menu > Tools > GMRE Simulator.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 User analyses the results of the GMRE audit in the Show GMRE Audit Logs report. If

“success” is indicated, the GMPLS dimensioning is guaranteed. For more information,

see “Show GMRE Audit Logs” (p. 6-31).

GMRE Simulator use case 2 — evaluate tolerance of GMPLS restoration dimensioning

The following use case provides an example using the GMRE Simulator to evaluate

tolerance of GMPLS restoration dimensioning.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 User creates an existing GMPLS network dimensioning it with N failures. During the

GMPLS dimensioning phase, 3R NEs dedicated to restoration are dimensioned for both

Transponder A and B. After dimensioning phase, ONDP automatically populates the 3R

for Restoration Count [TrxA] and 3R for Restoration Count [TrxB] fields on the Edit

Sites window, indicating that 3R NEs have been positioned for restoration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 User defines the number of failures in the Set Design Parameters pages. The number of

failures is different from the number used in the GMPLS network dimensioning. For

more information, see “Section 8: Design Parameters” (p. 4-114).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 User launches the GMRE Simulator to simulate failures in the network using this path:

Main menu > Tools > GMRE Simulator.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 User analyses the results of the GMRE audit in the Show GMRE Audit Logs report. The

report indicates scenarios that have failed as well as scenarios that have succeeded. For

more information, see “Show GMRE Audit Logs” (p. 6-31).

GMRE Simulator use case 3: restoration analysis

The following use case provides an example using the GMRE Simulator to perform an

audit to perform restoration analysis. The analysis can determine if restorable services

will survive failures, and if the current available resources are sufficient or if resources

are unused.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 User creates and configures existing network in ONDP. For more information, see

“Methods to create and configure a network” (p. 7-2).

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis — GMRE Simulator

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-10 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If the user wants to perform a real network audit, then all resources are set to the

Manual or NLP/OSNR Computation Mode parameter and all services paths are fully

described as service constraints. If the user wants to perform an optimized or optimized

network audit, all resources are set to the Automatic or Semi-Auto Computation Mode

and no path constraints are defined in services. For more information on the Computation

Mode parameter, see Table 4-10, “Links parameters” (p. 4-39).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 The user selects the list of elements (links, nodes, and SRGs) that are set to fail in the

Failures Scope window. For more information, see “Failures Scope” (p. 4-105).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 User launches the GMRE Simulator to simulate failures in the network using this path:

Main menu > Tools > GMRE Simulator.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 User analyzes the results of the failure analysis in the Show GMRE Audit Logs report.

For more information, see “Show GMRE Audit Logs” (p. 6-31).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Additionally, the user analyzes results using the “Show Failures Report” (p. 6-24) and

“Export Design Results Excel Report” (p. 6-45) report options.

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis — GMRE Simulator

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

7-11

Network Analysis: Audit and Upgrade Audit: Failure and Restoration Analysis — GMRE Simulator

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-12 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

8 8Modifications for ONDP

Design

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides information on how to make manual modifications on shelves and

ports using the ONDP application, after a design has been run successfully.

Contents

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts 8-2

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface 8-7

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Concepts 8-15

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface 8-16

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

8-1

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts

Overview

After running a network design, the user can manually modify shelves . These manual

shelf modifications are allowed on all sites except ILA and bypass sites. ONDP updates

the modifications in reports such as the Show Bill of Materials and Show Sites/Part List,

and modification status is indicated for the resource. For more information on the manual

shelf modification interface, see “Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs -

Interface” (p. 8-7)

Important! - manual shelf modifications are accepted by ONDP without checks of

coherence with 1626LM rules. Design is not guaranteed if manual modification is done

during incremental design. Manual modification can create conflict on the automatic

mode.

Supported shelf modifications

The following list describes the supported shelf modifications.

• Move a board position in the same shelf or in a different shelf

• Add a new shelf containing the default mandatory boards

• Remove an existing shelf as long as it contains only mandatory boards

• Add a new rack containing one shelf, containing the default mandatory boards

• Remove an existing rack, as long as its shelves contain only mandatory boards

• Move a shelf position

• Move a rack position

Shelf modifications not supported

The following list describes the shelf modifications that are not supported.

• Remove a board

• Add a board

• Move the position of a mandatory board

• Exchange the position between boards of different sizes

Manual shelf modification are not supported for users with read-only profiles.

Shelf modification interface

Shelf modifications are made through the Edit Equipments window. For more information

on the interface, see “Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface”

(p. 8-7).

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-2 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Board modification status

Once the network design is run, the board modification status is reported in the Edit

Equipments window as an icon and the Show/Sites Part List report in the Status field.

This status indicates whether or not a board has been modified and/or frozen by the user,

or that the board is or is not modifiable.

The following table describes the board modification status.

Table 8-1 Board modification status description

Status Status field description

(indicated in the Show

Site/Parts List report)

Status icon (indicated in

the Edit Equipments

window)

Auto-only Indicates mandatory boards or

line shelves boards, which are

not able to be modified

Red lock icon

Auto Indicates the board has not

been modified or frozen by

the user

No icon

Frozen Indicates the board position

has been modified by the user

or has been frozen by the user

Black lock icon

Boards are given a status of Frozen in one of the following ways:

• Direct command - the board position is modified by the user. The user can drag and

drop a board from one position to another.

• Direct command - the board position is frozen by the user. The user can use the

Freeze command to prevent a board from modification.

• Indirect command - a board is indirectly frozen as a result of the direct command to

freeze a related board.

Boards that have a Frozen status may also be unfrozen, with the direct Unfreeze

command. The Unfreeze command changes the board status to Auto.

Effects of the Freeze/Unfreeze commands

Freezing a board using the direct Freeze command can cause other boards to be frozen

indirectly. Also, boards previously frozen and then unfrozen can have an effect. Further,

freezing a board by direct command can have an effect on services.

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

8-3

There are two types of boards to consider when determining the direct and indirect effects

of freezing or unfreezing.

• Line boards - including WMAN_line and/or BMDX_line

• Add/Drop boards - including WMAN_A/D, ALCT_Add or ALCT_Drop

For Add/Drop boards, the user must consider the following illustration to determine the

effects of freezing or unfreezing boards.

For Each Add/Drop board there are two sides for each direction.

• In the Tx direction: Tx_Out (upstream) and TX_In (downstream)

• In the Rx direction: Rx_Out (downstream) and Rx_In (upstream)

Effect of direct Freeze command on other boards status

When a direct freeze command is set on an Add/Drop board, the following indirect

settings occur on other boards. A freeze on a Line board does not involve these effects.

• Upstream: between the board and WDM line, the status of all linked boards is

indirectly set to Frozen. Line board are not included. Note that for an OCPU board,

there could be up to four upstream paths in two directions: Tx_Out and Rx_In

• Downstream: between the board and client traffic (service), the status of all linked

boards is indirectly set to Frozen. Note that for a concentrator or TR2D, the

downstream path could be divided into two or more paths, in two direction: Tx_In and

Rx_Out.

Figure 8-1 Add/Drop boards directions and sides

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-4 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Effect of direct Unfreeze command on other boards status

When a direct unfreeze command is set from Frozen to Auto on a Add/Drop board the

following are the effects to the indirect settings on other boards statuses.

• Upstream: between the board and WDM line, for both directions (Tx_Out and

Rx_In) along the cabling, boards are considered one by one, until a Line board is

reached:

– If the next board (N+1) is connected to its own downstream board of the same

direction to another frozen N+1 board, board N is left at frozen and there is no

change to the status further in the upstream path.

– If the N+1 board downstream in the same direction supports no frozen board then

it is indirectly set to Auto

Downstream: between the board and client traffic (service), the path directions (Tx_In

and Rx_Out) are treated separately. For a concentrator or a TR2D the downstream path

could be divided into two or more paths.

• From the board, in both directions moving toward the services in the cabling, the

previous boards in the downstream chains are considered one by one. The

downstream boards in the downstream paths of the board are unfrozen. The status of

all linked boards is indirectly set to Auto.

For ALCT of EMPM boards, a freeze or unfreeze direct command is as if the command

were also a direct command on the board to which it is attached. A freeze or unfreeze

command on a board connected to an ALCT or EMPM implies that the same command is

made on the ALCT or EMPM.

Effect on services of Frozen status

When a transponder or concentrator status is set to Frozen either by direct or undirect

command, the corresponding service(s) directly linked to the board are effected in the

following ways:

• A constraint is applied to each involved service as if the request « Freeze […]

Computed Path (Spatial + Spectral) » were applied, with […] = [W] or [P], according

to the concerned board role (Working or Protecting) for the service. The constraint

will be the previous request or the previous computed value (the most recent of

those).

• For multidirectional NEs, if for the service, the board handles the Working path, if the

NE is the service source, the Working Source A/D is set to its fixed or computed

value. (It is no longer set to Auto). If the NE is the service destination, the Working

Destination A/D is set to its fixed or computed value. (It is no longer set to Auto).

• For multidirectional NEs, if for the service, the board handles the Protecting path. if

the NE is the service source, the Protecting Source A/D is set to its fixed or computed

value. (It is no longer set to Auto). If the NE is the service destination, the Protecting

Destination A/D is set to its fixed or computed value. (It is no longer set to Auto).

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

8-5

When a board status is set to Frozen, and the user modifies one of the above services, it is

as if a direct unfreeze request was applied to the board.

When a board status is set to Frozen, ONDP is able to attach new services and/or new

boards through the automatic design process.

Shelf modifications conditions and connectivity

Shelf modifications are allowed only after a successful design is run. A successful design

is indicated by a green flag on the Run Full Design icon on the Main menu.

Shelf modification is not allowed if the Node connectivity on the NE is set to Auto.

(Node connectivity is set using the Edit NE window).

If the status of at lease one board on the NE is set to Frozen, the Node connectivity

cannot be set to Auto.

Shelf modifications and Multidirection A/D blocks

If an action in the Edit NE window involves a decrease of the number of Multidir A/D

blocks, this request will unfreeze all boards with the Frozen status on the NE linked to

the suppressed Multidir A/D block(s).

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-6 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

Overview

After running a network design, the user can manually modify equipment. These manual

shelf modifications are allowed on all sites except ILA and bypass sites. ONDP updates

the modifications in reports such as the Show Bill of Materials and Show Sites/Part List,

and modification status is indicated for the resource. For more information on manual

modification of shelves, see “Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Concepts”

(p. 8-2).

Edit Equipments window

Shelf modifications are done through the Edit Equipments window. To access the Edit

Equipments window, right click a site icon on the Map, and select Show Equipment View

from the Site pop-up menu.

Figure 8-2 Edit Equipments window

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

8-7

Edit Equipments window Main menu

The Edit Equipments window Main menu contains the following options:

• File

• Edit

• Display

File menu commands

Table 8-2 File menu commands and descriptions

File menu command Description

Print Print command

Exit Close the Edit Equipments window

Edit menu commands

Table 8-3 Edit menu commands and descriptions

Edit menu command Description

Copy to Clipboard Copy the selected information to the clipboard

Figure 8-3 Edit Equipments window File menu

Figure 8-4 Edit Equipments window Edit menu

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-8 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Display menu commands

Table 8-4 Display menu commands and descriptions

Display menu command Description

Zoom Displays a list of Zoom options to make the

window image larger or smaller. Possible

options are: 600%, 200%, 100%, 66%, or 50%

Use Schematic View Check the checkbox to display schematic

views of the equipment. This view shows the

equipment faceplates.

Left navigation tree

The left side of the Edit Equipments window contains a navigation tree. This area of the

window is used to:

• Edit equipment

• Add equipment

• Freeze or unfreeze all equipment at a selected level

• Delete equipment

Figure 8-5 Edit Equipments window Display menu

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

8-9

Display or highlight selected equipment in the Edit Equipments main panel

Using the left mouse button, the user can change the display of Edit Equipments window

main panel in the following ways:

• Single left-click on an equipment in the navigation tree highlights the selected

equipment in the main panel

• Double left-click on an equipment in the navigation tree displays only the selected

equipment and its components on the main panel

Figure 8-6 Left navigation tree

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-10 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Left navigation tree menus

Depending on the equipment level in the navigation tree, right click to display a menu for

the level.

Site level

There are no menus associated with top most Site level.

NE level menu and windows

The second level in the left navigation tree is the NE level. Right click an NE icon in the

left navigation tree to display the NE level menu.

The following table describes the options in the NE level menu in the left navigation tree.

Table 8-5 NE level menu options

Option Description

Add Rack Adds a default rack to the NE, with the

appropriate default equipment.

Freeze All Boards in NE All boards with a status of Auto are changed to

Frozen

Unfreeze All Boards in NE All board with a status of Frozen are changed

to Auto

Rack level menu

The third level in the left navigation tree is the Rack level. Right click a rack in the left

navigation tree to display the rack level menu.

Figure 8-7 NE level menu

Figure 8-8 Rack level menu

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

8-11

The following table describes the options in the Rack level menu

Table 8-6 Rack level menu options

Option Description

Add SubRack Adds a default 1626 subrack to the rack with

default mandatory boards included.

Add PSS32 SubRack Adds a PSS32 subrack to the rack with default

mandatory boards included

Freeze all boards in Rack All boards with a status of Auto are changed to

Frozen

Unfreeze all boards in Rack All boards with a status of Frozen are changed

to Auto

Delete Rack Deletes the selected rack.

SubRack level menu

The fourth level in the left navigation tree is the SubRack level. Right click a rack in the

left navigation tree to display the subrack level menu.

The following table describes the options in the SubRack level menu

Table 8-7 SubRack level menu options

Option Description

Freeze all boards in SubRack All boards with a status of Auto are changed to

Frozen

Unfreeze all boards in SubRack All boards with a status of Frozen are changed

to Auto

Delete SubRack Deletes the selected subrack.

Edit Equipments window Main Panel

The Edit Equipments window Main panel presents the Network Element equipment

graphically.

Figure 8-9 SubRack level menu

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-12 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Edit Equipments window menu

To access the Edit Equipments window menu, right click on the equipment, Note: If the

board modification status is Auto-only, indicated by a red lock icon, the menu will not

display. For more information on board modification status, see “Board modification

status” (p. 8-3).

The following menu displays for all boards, except concentrators.

The following menu is displayed for concentrator only.

Figure 8-10 Edit Equipments window Main panel

Figure 8-11 Edit Equipments window menu - all boards except concentrators

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

8-13

Edit Equipments window menu commands and descriptions

Command Description

Freeze The board status is changed to Frozen. If the

board status is Auto, this command is active.

Unfreeze The board status if changed to Auto. If the

board status is Frozen, this command is

active.

Show Port Window (shown for concentrator

boards only)

Opens the Ports View window for the selected

concentrator.

Figure 8-12 Edit Equipments window menu - concentrators

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Shelf Modifications for ONDP Designs - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-14 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Concepts

Overview

After running a network design, the user can manually modify the ports configuration on

concentrators. These manual concentrator port modifications are allowed on TRBC1191,

TRBC4616, TRBC4617, 112SX10U, and ETHC1000. Modifications are allowed on the

same board only. The user may not modify ILA and bypass sites.

Manual concentrator ports management includes a port allocation modification or an

exchange between two ports allocation. WARNING : Modifications on ports must be

done symmetrically on source/destination and/or on working/protecting otherwise the

service will not work.

Important! - manual modification of concentrator ports are accepted by ONDP without

checks.

Concentrator port modifications conditions

The following conditions apply for manual port modifications:

• A successful design must be run prior to modification. This is indicated by a green

flag on the Run Full Design icon on the Main menu.

• Node connectivity on the NE must not be set to Auto. (Node connectivity is set using

the Edit NE window).

Manual management of ports on concentrators interface

Manual management of ports on concentrators is performed on the Ports View window.

for more information on this interface, see “Manual Management of Ports on

Concentrators - Interface” (p. 8-16)

In the case of a cascade of concentrators, (2.5G->10G->40G): TRBC1191 (client side)

connected to TRBC4_16, (WDM line side), the user is able to toggle between the Ports

View line side and client side, using a Go to command. For more information, see “Ports

View window” (p. 8-16)

Concentrator ports Status

For each applicable concentrator port, the port status is reported in the Status field of the

Port View window. Possible values of the Status field are:

• Auto - default value.

• Frozen - given to a concentrator port when the port allocation is modified, either

individually or through an allocation exchange.

The user is able to manually modify each port status individually, from Auto to Frozen,

and from Frozen to Auto.

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Concepts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

8-15

Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface

Overview

After running a network design, the user can manually manage ports on concentrators.

These manual concentrator ports modifications are allowed on all sites except ILA and

bypass sites.

Ports View window

The Ports View window enables the user to manually manage ports on concentrators. For

more information on manual concentrator ports management, see “Manual Management

of Ports on Concentrators - Concepts” (p. 8-15)

In the case of a cascade of concentrators, (2.5G->10G->40G): TRBC1191 (client side)

connected to TRBC4_16, (WDM line side), the user is able to toggle between the Ports

View line side and client side, using a Go to command. as shown in the examples below.

Figure 8-13 Ports View window - Example 1

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-16 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Ports View window access

ONDP provides the following ways to access the Ports View window.

• “From the Edit Services window” (p. 8-17). For more information on the Edit

Services window, see “Edit Services window” (p. 4-57)

• “From the Line View window” (p. 8-18). For more information on the Line View

window, see “Show Line View” (p. 6-41)

• “From the Edit Equipments window” (p. 8-18). For more information on the Edit

Equipments window, see “Show Equipment View” (p. 6-40) and “Edit Equipments

window” (p. 8-7)

From the Edit Services window

From the Edit Services window do the following access the Ports View window:

• From the Services table, right click a service that contains a concentrator. The

Services table pop-up menu displays.

• From the Service table pop-up menu, select Ports View. The “Ports View pop-up

menu” (p. 8-18) displays.

• From the Ports View pop-up menu, select the appropriate command. The“Ports View

window” (p. 8-16) is displayed.

Figure 8-14 Ports View window - Example 2

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

8-17

From the Line View window

From the Line View window do the following access the Ports View window.

• From the Line View window, double-click the desired channel for which to display

the Ports View window. The rest of the window will be greyed out and the Open

command on the Main menu will become active.

• From the Line View main menu, select Open.

• From the Open menu, select either Source Port Window to open the Ports View

window for the source port, or Destin Port Window to open the Port View window

for the destination port. The “Ports View window” (p. 8-16) is displayed if the

channel transmission is made through a concentrator.

From the Edit Equipments window

From the Edit Equipments window do the following access the Ports View window

• In the Main panel, right-click a concentrator equipment for wich the Ports View

window will be displayed. The Equipment menu is displayed

• From the Equipment menu, click Show Port Window. The “Ports View window”

(p. 8-16) is displayed.

Ports View pop-up menu

The Ports View pop-up menu contains commands that open the Ports View window for

the selected concentrator.

The following table describes the commands in the Ports View pop-up menu.

Table 8-8 Ports View pop-up menu

Command Description

Working [W] Source Ports View Opens the Ports View window to manually

manage working source ports for the selected

service

Working [W] Destination Ports View Opens the Ports View window to manually

manage working destination ports for the

selected service

Figure 8-15 Ports View pop-up menu

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-18 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Table 8-8 Ports View pop-up menu (continued)

Command Description

Protecting [P] Source Ports View Opens the Ports View window to manually

manage protecting source ports for the

selected service

Protecting [P] Destination Ports View Opens the Ports View window to manually

manage protecting destination ports for the

selected service

Ports View window

The following table describes the fields in the Ports View window.

Table 8-9 Ports View window field descriptions

Client side

Field

Client side

Description

Ports The port number on the concentrator. To

manage the port connection, click the Ports

field and select the new port from the

displayed list.

Status The status of the port. Default value is Auto.

For more information, see “Concentrator ports

Status” (p. 8-15)

Connected to: Information about the service or board to

which the port is connected.

W/P Identifies the service as working (W) or

protecting (P)

Action In the case of a cascade of concentrators,

(2.5G->10G->40G): TRBC1191 (client side)

connected to TRBC4_16, (WDM line side),

the Go to command is displayed in this

column. Click the Go to command to toggle

between the Ports View client side and line

side Ports View windows

WDM line side

Field

WDM line side

Description

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

8-19

Table 8-9 Ports View window field descriptions (continued)

Client side

Field

Client side

Description

Connected to: Information about the board to which the port

is connected.

In the case of a cascade of concentrators,

(2.5G->10G->40G): TRBC1191 (client side)

connected to TRBC4_16, (WDM line side),

the Go to button is displayed in this field.

Click the Go to button to toggle between the

Ports View line side and client side Ports View

windows

The Connected to: field contains the following information:

• For each tributary the direct next downstream connection (towards the client side) for

each port is displayed as follows:

If the board is directly linked to

– a service - the service label is displayed (*)

– another board (except OCPU) - the board type and location is displayed (**)

– an OCPU - the OCPU type and location are displayed followed by a semi colon ;

and the direct next downstream connection as described in (*) and (**) above

• The direct next upstream connection (towards the WDM line side) for each port is

displayed as follows:

If the board is a

– tributary - the board type and the board location +port is displayed

– OCPU - the OCPU type and location is displayed. Also the direct next upstream

connection board, type and board location +port for the Working and Protecting

paths is displayed

Modifications for ONDP Design Manual Management of Ports on Concentrators - Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-20 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

9 9Map Management

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides information on how to generate and calibrate background maps for

the ONDP application.

Contents

Map Generation 9-2

Launch the Map Generation Application 9-7

Generate a Background Map 9-8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

9-1

Map Generation

Map Generation overview

ONDP provides the Map Generation application, which enables users to generate multiple

calibration maps used in network design. After generation, the maps are displayed as

background maps, which are selected from the Choose the default background map

field at the start of the ONDP application, or at the start of a new network design.

Note: Initially, ONDP includes a default background map of Europe, referred to as

Europe [Relief] and a blank map, referred to as Empty Map.

Map Generation command file

The command file which runs the Map Generation application is stored in the ONDP root

directory, in the Programs folder. The command to run this file is:

ondp_mapbuilder.exe

The path to this file is:

Program Files/Alcatel-Lucent/ONDP X.X (where X.X is the release number).

Map source file

The user background maps are generated by the ONDP Map Generation application from

any source map file, as long as the file is in GIF, JPEG or PNG format, and is stored on

the user's PC.

Map generation and calibration process

Background maps are generated and calibrated through a five step process, presented in a

series of five Map Calibration windows. The steps are described in the following sections.

For detailed task information on map generation and calibration, see “Generate a

Background Map” (p. 9-8).

At the end of this process a new background map with the specified name is stored in the

ONDPMapDir folder. When creating a network design, generated maps can be selected and

displayed on the Topology Map as part of the network design.

Map Calibration - Step 1 window

The Map Calibration - Step 1 window creates the background map name and identifies

the user's source map file from which the background map will be generated.

Map Management Map Generation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-2 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Map Calibration - Step 2 window

The Map Calibration - Step 2 window displays the user's source map file. From this

display, select the area of the source map which will be generated as the new background

map.

Figure 9-1 Map Calibration - Step 1 window

Figure 9-2 Map Calibration - Step 2 window

Map Management Map Generation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

9-3

Map Calibration - Step 3 window

The Map Calibration - Step 3 window specifies a site on the north west part of the map.

This selects the pixels on the map where the first site is located. In this example, Paris is

the site specified.

Map Calibration - Step 4 window

The Map Calibration - Step 4 window specifies a site in the south east direction of the site

specified in the previous window. This selects the pixels on the map where the second site

is located. The further the sites are from each other, a better calibration is possible. In this

example, Lyon is specified.

Figure 9-3 Map Calibration - Step 3 window

Map Management Map Generation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-4 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Map Calibration - Step 5 window

The Map Calibration - Step 5 window enables the user to enter names for the sites

selected in the previous calibration steps, and to indicate the Geographic Information

System (GIS) (latitude/longitude) coordinates of the sites for map calibration. This step

associates the pixels selected in Step 3 and Step 4 with the GIS information, to allow the

system to calibrate the map. Note: Accurate GIS information is essential to proper

calibration of the map. If inaccurate GIS information is used, the calibrated sites may not

be within the map area.

Map Management Map Generation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

9-5

Figure 9-4 Map Calibration - Step 5 window

Map Management Map Generation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-6 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Launch the Map Generation Application

When to use

Use this task to launch the Map Generation application on the PC.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Map Generation” (p. 9-2)

Before you begin

Before you begin this task, a source map file in GIF, JPEG or PNG format must be stored

on the user's PC.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Locate the executable application file ondp_mapbuilder.exe using this path:

C:/Program files/Alcatel-Lucent/ONDP X.X (where X.X is the release number).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Double click on the ondp_mapbuilder.exe executable file.

Result: The application is launched, and the Map Calibration - Step 1 window is

displayed.

Map Management Launch the Map Generation Application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

9-7

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Generate a Background Map

When to use

Use this task to generate and calibrate a new background map to use in network design.

Related information

See the following topic in this document:

• “Map Generation” (p. 9-2)

Before you begin

Before you begin this task, a source map file in GIF, JPEG or PNG format must be stored

on the user's PC.

Task

Use this task to generate and calibrate a new background map.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps in the “Launch the Map Generation Application” (p. 9-7) to start the

Map Generation application.

Result: The Map Calibration - Step 1 window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:

• In the Enter the map name field, enter the name of the new map.

• In the Select map image field, click the File icon to open the Load background image

window. Use the file hierarchy to explore to the map source file. Select the map

source file and click Open.

Result: The map source file is selected.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click the Next button.

Result: The Map Calibration Informations window displays the message

Select the area you want to keep on the map, and press Next

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click the OK button.

Map Management Generate a Background Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-8 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Result: The map source file is displayed in the Map Calibration - Step 2 window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Map Calibration - Step 2 window, select the area of the displayed map source file

to be used in the new background map using any of the following tools:

Tool Description

Zoom in icon Click the icon to make the area smaller

Zoom out icon Click the icon to make the area larger

Image Scale Icon Click the icon to bring the map to initial size

Select all map icon Click the icon to select the entire area of the

source map

Graphic box Click and drag on the map to manipulate a

graphics box for the selected area

Result: The area to be generated as the background map is selected.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click the Next button.

Result: The Map Calibration Informations window displays the message

Place a site on the map, and press Next

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click the OK button.

Result: The Map Calibration - Step 3 window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click on the map where the initial site is located. This selects the pixels on the map where

the initial site is located.

Result: A black dot appears on the selected site.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click the Next button.

Result: The Map Calibration Informations window displays the message

Place a second site at the south east of the first site, and

press next. The Further the sites, the better calibration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click the OK button.

Map Management Generate a Background Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

9-9

Result: The Map Calibration - Step 4 window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Click on the map where the second site is located. This selects the pixels on the map

where the second site is located.

Result: A black dot appears on the second selected site.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Click the Next button.

Result: The following two results occur:

• A new background map is created and saved in the C:/Program Files/ONDP

X.X/ONDPMapDir folder (where X.X is the release number). The name of the file

is the name specified in the Map Calibration - Step 1 window. The file is saved in

the PNG format.

• The Skip Calibration window displays the message

Do you want to skip the calibration phase?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Do one of the following:

• If you wish to skip the map calibration phase, click the Yes button.

Result: The application is closed. End of Steps.

• If you wish to continue with the map calibration phase, click the No button.

Result: The Map Calibration - Step 5 window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 In the Map Calibration - Step 5 window, do the following:

• In the North West Point Informations section:

– In the Site Name field, enter the first site name specified in the Map Calibration -

Step 3 window

– In the Enter GIS X field, enter the longitude coordinate of the site

– In the Enter GIS Y field, enter the latitude coordinate of the site

• In the South East Point Informations section:

– In the Site Name field, enter the second site name specified in the Map

Calibration - Step 4 window

– In the Enter GIS X field, enter the longitude coordinate of the site

– In the Enter GIS Y field, enter the latitude coordinate of the site

• Click the Next button.

Map Management Generate a Background Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-10 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Result: The message The map calibration end successful is displayed. and

the new background map will be presented in the list of available maps when

beginning a network design. For more information, see “Section 1: Starting the

Design” (p. 4-3).

Map Management Generate a Background Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

9-11

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Map Management Generate a Background Map

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-12 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A A/D

Add and Drop

Access Identifier (AID)

A unique identifier used to address equipment slots and ports, as well as facility tributaries, that

are defined for system architecture.

ACO (Alarm Cut-Off)

A push-button switch on the indicator strip that can be used to retire an audible office alarm.

ADM

Add and Drop Multiplex

A high-speed multiplexing function offered by SONET/SDH that allows lower level signals to be

added to or dropped from an optical carrier channel.

AFI

Authority and Format Identifier

AID

See “Access IDentifier”.

AIS

Alarm Indication Signal

A signal sent downstream by an NE to indicate that its incoming signal has failed.

Alarm

External notification or display of failure condition. The indication of a failure towards an

external system interface or from audible or visible indicators.

Alarm Severity

Defines the priority of the alarm message. The method in which alarms are processed depends on

their severity.

ALCT

Automatic Level ConTrol

ALS

Automatic Laser Shutdown

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

GL-1

AMS

Alcatel Maintenance Signal. There are two types of AMS: AMSs (for legacy submarine

equipment) and AMSt (for legacy terrestrial equipment)

ANTP

Alcatel Network Time Protocol

APA

Automatic Pre-emphasis Adjustment

APC

Automatic Power Control

APD

Avalanche Photo Detector

A diode that increases its electrical conductivity by a multiplication effect when hit by light. APDs

are used in lightwave receivers because the APDs have a greater sensitivity to weakened light

signals (for example, those which have traveled long distances over fiber).

APE

Automatic Power Equalization

APS

Automatic Protection Switching

A feature that allows a protection or standby entity (for example, optical line or board) to be

automatically selected and reconfigured if an incoming signal or equipment failure occurs.

APSD

Automatic Power ShutDown

APT

Amplifier Power Tuning

AS

Alarm Surveillance

ASAP

Alarm Severity Assignment Profile

ASIC

Application Specific Integrated Circuit

ATTD

ATTendeD (Alarm storing)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B B&W

Black and White

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-2 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

BDFB

Battery Distribution and Fuse Bay

Bit Error Rate (BER)

BER measures how accurately a bit stream is transmitted through a system. It measures how

many bits are received in error compared to how many are sent. It is the ratio of error bits

received to the total number of bits transmitted.

BMDX

Band Multiplexer DemultipleXer

BOFA

Band Optical Fiber Amplifier

BOL

Beginning of Life

BOM

Bill of Materials

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C CAD

Channel Add-drop Card

Used with automatic power management; allows setpoints for a manual transmission line.

CBR

Constant Bit Rate

CD-ROM

Compact Disk, Read-Only Memory

CDR

Clock and Data Recovery

Ch

Channel

Channel

A communication path or the signal sent over that path.

CID

Card Identifier

CLEI

Common Language Equipment Identification

CLEI codes enable you to clearly and consistently identify and track virtually every type of

telecommunications equipment. In the United States, these codes are assigned by Telecordia and

are 10 bytes long.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

GL-3

CLI

Command Line Interface

Client-AIS

Alarm Indicator Signal (Client side)

CLNP

ConnectionLess Network Protocol

An OSI network layer protocol that allows data to be transmitted without first requiring that a

circuit be established.

CMDX

Channel Multiplexer DemultipleXer

COTDR

Coherent Optical Time Domain Reflectometer

CPE

Customer Premises Equipment

Refers to any type of telephone equipment, for example, answering machines, etc. on customer

premises.

CT

Craft Terminal

The user interface terminal used by craft personnel to communicate with a network element.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

D DAPI

Destination Address Point Identifier

DC_DC

DC/DC Direct Current Converter

DCC

Data Communication Channel - A portion of the SDH/SONET signal that contains alarms,

surveillance, and performance information.

Data Country Code

DCM

Dispersion Compensation Module

Spooled fiber used to control excess dispersion found in certain fiber types at pre- and

post-amplification.

DCN

Data Communication Network

DCNs support communication between NEs and the NMS.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-4 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

DCU

Dispersion Compensating Unit

See also “DCM”

DDM

Digital Diagnostic Monitoring

DEMUX or DMX

Demultiplexer

A module that separates two or more signals previously combined by compatible multiplexing

equipment.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

A protocol that automates the configuration of computers that use TCP/IP. DHCP allows a DHCP

server to automatically assign an IP address to a computer's TCP/IP stack software. The number is

taken from a defined range of numbers for a given network.

DSP

Domain Specific Part or Digital Signal Processing

DTMF

Dual Tone Modulation Frequency

DTV

Decision Threshold Voltage

DV

Digital Video

DWDM

Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

A multiplexing technique that uses close spectral spacing of individual optical carrier wavelengths

to reduce the total number of fibers needed to provide a given amount of information-carrying

capacity. The technique takes advantage of desirable transmission characteristics (for example,

minimum dispersion or attenuation) within a given fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E EAM

Electro Absorption Modulator

EC

Equipment Controller card

ECC

Embedded Channel Communication

ECID

Enhanced Card IDentifier

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

GL-5

ECMA

European Computer Manufacturers Association (Former standardizing information and

communication system organization)

ECT

Equipment Craft Terminal

EDFA

Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier

A type of amplifier with a short length of fiber that been doped with erbium and spliced into the

operating single-mode fiber (SMF). A three-port wavelength division multiplexer (WDM) is used,

with one incoming port connected to the operating fiber carrying the primary signal in the 1550

nm window, one incoming port attached to a pump laser operating at 980 nm or 1480 nm, and one

outgoing port connected to the operating fiber.

EEPROM

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

A type of non-volatile memory often used to store inventory data.

EMC

Electromagnetic Compatibility

The ability of a device or system to function without error in its intended electromagnetic

environment.

EMI

Electromagnetic Interference

High-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields that cause data corruption in cables passing

through the fields.

EML

Equipment Management Layer

Electroabsorption Modulated Laser - When laser is modulated using a Mach-Zehnder modulator.

EMPM

External Multi-Pump Module

EOL

End Of Life

Defines the status or values at the end of the guaranteed lifetime of a component. EOL is reached

when the wear-out failure rate dominates the component failure rate.

EOW

Engineering Order Wire

EPT

Engineering and Planning Tool

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-6 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

ESC

Equipment and Shelf Controller

ESCT

Equipment and Shelf ConTroller

ESD

Electrostatic Discharge

Static electrical energy potentially harmful to boards and humans.

ESTI

European Telecommunication Standard Institute

Located in Sophia-Antipolis, France, ETSI is the European counterpart of ANSI. Its task is to

pave the way for telecommunications integration in the European community as part of the single

European market program. It establishes telecommunication standards for the European

community.

EXP

Expansion

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

F FC

Fiber Channel

FDI

Forward Defect Indication

An automatic and fully distributed capability which indicated a failure in a server networking

layer (e.g. Physical Layer). When used with other mechanisms such as CV (Connectivity

Verification), it can indicate defects such as misbranding of Label Switched Paths (LSPs) and

errors in swapping LSP labels.

FEC

Forward Error Correction

A technique used for error detection and correction in which the transmitting host computer

includes some number of redundant bits in the payload (data field) of a block or frame of data.

The receiving device uses those bits to detect, isolate, and correct any errors created during

transmission. FEC avoids having to retransmit information which incurred errors in network

transit.

FIT

Failure In Time

A unit of failure rate in reliability analysis. One FIT is equivalent to one failure per one billion

operating hours.

FPGA

Field Programmable Gate Array

A user-configurable logic device that holds user-defined logic constructs and interconnects in the

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

GL-7

form of a microprocessor. Examples include EEPROM and FLASH.

FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

A protocol used for exchanging files over the Internet. FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols to

enable data transfer. FTP is most commonly used to download/upload a file to/from a server using

the Internet.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

G Gain

The increase in power and magnitude of a signal.

GbE

Gigabit Ethernet

A transmission technology based on the Ethernet frame format and protocol used in local area

networks (LANs) that provides a data rate of one billion bits (one gigabit) per second. Gigabit

Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3 standard and is currently used as the backbone in many

enterprise networks.

GCC

Generic Communication Channel

GE_FC

Gigabit Ethernet Fiber Channel

GMPLS

Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching

GMPLS is an extension of the MPLS protocol used in data networks. MPLS is packet based

technology that combines the advantages of packet and circuit based networks. GMPLS is the

extension of this concept to cope additionally with SDH and OTH based transmission networks.

Therefore, GMPLS includes, in addition to packet switching capable devices (IP/MPLS), frame

(Ethernet), cell (ATM), timeslot (SONET/SDH, OTH), wavelength (optical channels) and spatial

(fiber) switching capable devices.

GMRE

Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching (GMPLS) Routing Engine

GR

Guaranteed Restoration services

GUI

Graphical User Interface

A program interface that takes advantage of the computer's graphics capabilities to make the

program easier to use.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-8 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

H HDLC

High Level Data Link Control

An ITU-TSS link layer protocol standard for point-to-point and multipoint communication. In

HDLC, the control information is always placed in the same position, and it uses specified bit

patterns very different from the data, thus reducing the likelihood of confusion.

HK

HouseKeeping

HW

Hardware

HWF

Hardware Failure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

I I/F

Interface

I/O

Input/Output

IDEG

Input DEGraded

IDI

Initial Domain Identifier

IEC

International Electrotechnical Commission

The international standards and conformity assessment body for all fields of electrotechnology,

including electricity and electronics.

ILM

Integrated Laser Modulator

ILOS

Input Loss Of Signal

IND

INDeterminate

IP

Internet Protocol

A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer

communication networks. The Internet Protocol provides for transmitting blocks of data called

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

GL-9

datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and destinations are hosts identified by

fixed-length addresses. The Internet Protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of

long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet networks.

IS-IS

Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System

ISO

International Standard Organization

A United Nations agency concerned with international standardization in a broad range of

industrial and technical fields.

ISPB

Intra Shelf Parallel Bus

ISSB

Intra Shelf Serial Bus

ITU

International Telecommunication Union

A United Nations telecommunications agency established to provide standardized

communications procedures and practices including frequency allocation and radio regulations on

a worldwide basis.

ITU-T

International Telecommunications Union — Telecommunication standardization sector. Formerly

known as CCITT: Comité Consultatif International Télégrafique & Téléphonique; International

Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

L LAN

Local Area Network

1. A communication link between two or more points within a small geographic area, such as

between buildings. 2. A data network that has a size of normally up to 10 km. Important LANs are

Ethernet, Token Ring, Token Bus, and FDDI.

LAPD

Link Access Protocol on D-channel

A special protocol of the OSI Data Link Layer that provides the functional and procedural means

to establish, maintain, and release data link connections for NEs. For NE-NE communications

over the DCC, Layer 2 services are provided by LAPD.

LED

Light Emitting Diode

A diode made out of semiconductor material like Gallium-Arsenide that translates electrical

current into light. An LED is a semiconductor that emits incoherent light to show failure or

service state of a board. It is also used to show the alarm and status condition of the system.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-10 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

LH

Long Haul

A 10 Gbps application for transmission of 128 channels, giving a capacity of 1.28 Tbps and a

reach of up to 2000 km. Payload (per channel) can be one OC-192/STM-64 or four

OC-48/STM-16 signals.

LM

Light Manager or Line Manager

LOF

Loss of Frame

LOF is detected when the OOF (out-of-frame) anomaly persists for a certain time.

LOFA

Line Optical Fiber Amplifier

Loopback

Type of diagnostic test used to compare an original transmitted signal with the resulting received

signal. A loopback is established when the received optical or electrical external transmission

signal is sent from a port or tributary unit directly back toward the output.

LOS

Loss of Signal

A condition where the optical input power falls below a prescribed threshold.

LR

Line Repeater

LSD

Laser ShutDown

LSP

Label Switched Path

LT

Line Terminal

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

M MAC

Medium Access Control

MAC Address

A computer's unique hardware number. The MAC address is used by the media access control

sublayer of the data link layer of telecommunications protocols and identifies each node in a

network.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

GL-11

MIB

Management Information Base

A formal description of a set of network objects that can be managed using the Simple Network

Management Protocol (SNMP). The information is represented in a tree format.

MMF or MM

Multi Mode Fiber

MPLS

MuliProtocol Label Switching

MS

Multiplex Section

MU/SPC

A flat-polished MU type optical connector.

Multiplexing

The process of combining multiple signals into a larger signal at the transmitter by a multiplexer.

The large signal is then split into the original smaller signals at the receiver by a demultiplexer.

MUX/Multiplexer

A device (board) that combines two or more transmission signals into a combined signal on a

shared medium.

MZ

Mach-Zehnder

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

N NCTL (Network Element Controller) Board

The NCTL provides control and user interfaces at the NE level.

NDC

Negative Dispersion Chromatic

NDSF

Non Dispersion Shifted Fiber

NDSF

Non Dispersion Shifted Fiber

NE

Network Element

The basic building block of a telecommunications equipment within a telecommunication

network that meets SONET/SDH standards. Typical internal attributes of a network element

include: one or more high- and low-speed transmission ports, built-in intelligence,

synchronization and timing capability, and access interfaces for use by technicians and/or

operation systems. In addition, a network element may be a time slot interchanger.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-12 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

NES

Network Element Synthesis

NML

Network Management Layer

NMS

Network Management System

Provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network, including

creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It has interfaces to external

systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement (SLA)

management.

NNI

Network-to-Network Interface

NRZ

Non-Return to Zero

A binary encoding in which ones and zeros are represented by opposite and alternating high and

low voltages and where there is no return to a zero voltage between encoded bits.

NSAP

Network Service Access Point (used in the OSI network layer).

An automatically assigned number that uniquely identifies a Network Element for the purposes of

routing DCC messages.

NTP

Network Time Protocol

An easy, accurate, and automatic method of getting and synchronizing date/time.

NURG

Not URGent

NZ–DSF

NonZero Dispersion Shifted Fiber

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

O OAC

Optical Amplifier Card

OADC

Optical Add & Drop Coupler

OADM

Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer

A network element which allows a WDM transmission link to add or drop optical signals, without

converting the photonic stream into an electrical signal. Insertion and extraction are done using

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

GL-13

optical fibers and demultiplexers. An OADM can be either non-reconfigurable or reconfigurable.

In the latter case, optical switches need to be used.

OBC

On Board Controller

OCH

Optical CHannel

OCHA

Optical CHannel Adaptation

OCNC

Optical CoNnectivity Coupler

OCPU

Optical Channel Protection Unit

OCWR

Optical Continuous Wave Reflectometer

An instrument used to characterize a fiber optic link where an unmodulated signal is transmitted

through the link, and the resulting light scattered and reflected back to the input is measured.

ODU

Optical Channel Data Unit

OGPI

Optical Generic Physical Interface

OH

OverHead

OLOS

Output Loss Of Signal

OMDX

Optical Multiplexer DemultipleXer

OMS

Optical Multiplex Section or Optical Management System

OMSA

Optical Multiplex Section Adaptation

OMSP

Optical Multiplex Section Protection

OND or ONDP

Optical Network Design Platform

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-14 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

OPC

Optical Protection Card

Optical Channel

An optical wavelength band for WDM optical communications.

OS

Operation System

OSC

Optical Supervisory Channel

The embedded overhead communications channel originating from 1626 NEs used for end-to-end

communications and maintenance. The OSC carries alarm, control, and status information

between network elements in a synchronous network.

OSCU

Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

OSI

Open System Interconnection reference model

A seven-layer model that pertains to the logical structure for communications networks

standardized by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). Adherence to the

standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate with any other OSI-compliant

system.

OSMC

Optical Spectrum Monitoring Control

OSNCP

Optical SubNetwork Connection Protection

OSNR

Optical Signal Noise Ratio

The ratio between the optical power of the data signal and the power of the optical noise signal.

OSPI

Optical Generic Physical Interface

OTM

Optical Transport Module, G.709

Provides bi-directional electrical/optical signal conversions in point-to-point applications. Optical

signals propagate at two wavelengths over a single fiber.

OTN

Optical Transport Network

Network used to transport user signals via ITU compliant wavelengths. The OTN is composed of

the OCH and OTS layers.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

GL-15

OTS

Optical Transmission Section

The lower layer of the OTN that provides physical transport. The OTS layer is terminated on an

OTS terminating equipment.

OTU

Optical channel Transport Unit

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

P PDH

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDL

Polarization Dependent Loss

Loss of optical power that occurs during the polarization process. Polarized light waves are light

waves in which the vibrations occur in a single plane. The process of transforming unpolarized

light into polarized light is known as polarization (the orientation of the electric and magnetic

field vectors of a propagating electro-magnetic wave).

PDP

Power Distribution Panel

PDU

Power Distribution Unit

PDU

Protocol Data Unit

A device used for the information exchange between equal protocol layers.

PGE

Programmable Gain Equalization

PIN

Positive - Intrinsic - Negative

PM

Performance Monitoring

Measures the quality of service and identifies degrading or marginally operating systems (before

an alarm would be generated).

PMA

Physical Medium Attachment

PMD

Physical Medium Dependent

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-16 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

PMD

Polarization Mode Dispersion

An inherent property of all optical media. It is caused by the difference in the propagation

velocities of light in the orthogonal principal polarization states of the transmission medium. The

net effect is that if an optical pulse contains both polarization components, then the different

polarization components travel at different speeds and arrive at different times, smearing the

received optical signal.

PMDC

Polarization Mode Dispersion Compensator

PPP

Point-to Point Protocol

An Internet Standard protocol. It establishes a link between two peer machines and maintains that

link by communicating through the hardware layer to the PPP layer on a peer system.

PRC

Protection and Restoration Combined services

PSUP

Power SUPply

PVID

Port Virtual IDentifier

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Q QECC

Interface with Q protocol for Embedded Control Channel

QoS

Quality of Service

A set of performance parameters that characterize the transmission quality over a given virtual

connection.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

R R-OADM

Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer

An optical network element with a configuration that can be changed remotely. The main benefit

of this feature is that it reduces Operating Expenditures (OPEX) when operating a network.

RA

Remote Alarm

RAM

Random Access Memory

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

GL-17

RDI

Remote Defect Indicator

RECT

REmote Craft Terminal

RGMII

Reduced Gigabit Media Independent Interface

RI

Remote Inventory

RPO

Receiver Parameter Optimization

RS

Regenerator Section

RS-AIS

Regenerator Section - Alarm Indicator Signal

RS-AIS is a proprietary Alcatel-Lucent Management Signal, defined as an SDH RS frame, with

all ones except Frame Alignment Word and B1 parity.

RSOH

Regenerator Section OverHead

RUM

Replaceable Unit Missing

RUP

Replaceable Unit Problem

RUTM

Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch

RWA

Routing and Wavalength Allocation

The path and wavelength allocated to a service.

Rx

Receiver or Receive

RZ

Return–to–Zero

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

S SAPI

Source Address Point Identifier

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-18 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

SB

Short Band

SBR

Source Based Restoration services

SBS

Stimulated Brillouin Scattering

SC

Shelf Controller

SC/APC

An angle-polished SC type optical connector.

SCP

Serial Communication Problem

SD

ShutDown

SDH

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

A set of fiber-optics-based standards planned for use with SONET and ATM in Europe,

standardized by the ITU-T. Some of the SDH and SONET standards are identical.

SFP

Small Form Factor Pluggable

An optical modular, hot-pluggable transceiver (compatible with IEE-802.3x) designed for use

with small form factor (SFP) connectors, offering high speed and physical compactness.

SLA

Service-Level Agreement

SLTE

Submarine Line Terminating Equipment

SMF or SM

Single Mode Fiber

A type of fiber which is very small in diameter that allows the light to be reflected in a single way

along the lightguide such that there is coherence in the arrival of the light signal.

SMS

Submarine Management System

SMSR

Side Mode Suppression Ratio

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

GL-19

SNCP

SubNetwork Connection Protection

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol

A standard protocol for the management of entities in an IP local area network (LAN). The

protocol used to transfer information between the network elements and the element management

system (EMS).

SPI

Serial Peripheral Interface

SPLM

Smart Photonic Layer Manager

SPV

SuPerVision

SRG

Shared Risk Group

SSF

Server Signal Failure

SUPVY

Supervisory Channels

Support the following communications: node-to-node, interworking, client LAN, and orderwire

communication.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

T TCA

Threshold Crossing Alert

A condition set when a counter exceeds a user-selected high or low threshold. A TCA does not

generate an alarm but is available on demand through the CIT.

TCP

Transmission Control Protocol

A protocol used with the Internet Protocol to send data in the form of message units between

computers over the Internet. While IP handles the actual delivery of the data, TCP keeps track of

the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing

through the Internet.

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

A suite of several networking protocols developed for the Internet that provides communication

across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware architectures, and

various operating systems. Some examples are FTP, SMTP, and SNMP.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-20 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

TDF

Total Dropped Frames

TDM

Time Division Multiplexing

A technique for transmitting a number of separate data, voice, and/or video signals simultaneously

over one communication medium by interleaving a portion of each signal one after another.

TDMX

Tunable DeMultiplexer

TIM

Trace Identifier Mismatch

TimActDis

TIM consequent Actions Disabled

TL1

Transaction Language 1

A machine-to-machine communications language that is a subset of ITU's human-machine

language. TL1 messages are expressed as ASCII strings. The messages and syntax are defined by

Telecordia.

TMN

Telecommunication Management Network

A network that interfaces with a telecommunications network at several points to receive

information from, and to control the operation of, the telecommunications network.

TP

Termination Point

TPD

TransPonDer

TR-OADM

Tunable and Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer

TRBC

TRIButary Concentrator

TRBD

TRIButary Direct

TRCF

Total Received Correct Frame

TRCO

Total Received Correct Octet

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

GL-21

TRSEF

Total Received Service Errored Frames

TRU

Top Rack Unit

TTF

Total Transmitted Frames

TTO

Total Transmitted Octets

TTP

Trail Termination Point

Tx

Transmitter or Transmit

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

U UAS

Unavailable Seconds

In performance monitoring, the count of seconds in which a signal is declared failed or in which

ten consecutively severely errored seconds (SES) occurred, until the time when ten consecutive

non-SES occur.

UDC

User Data Channel

UEP

Unequipped Equipment Present

UIC

User Interface Card

ULH

Ultra Long Haul

UNI

User-to-Network Interface

UR

UnRepeatered Systems

URG

URGent

USIB

USer Interface Board

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-22 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

USM

User Service Manager

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

V VCAT

Virtual Concatenation

Defines an inverse multiplexing procedure whereby the contiguous bandwidth is broken into

individual Virtual Containers (VC) at the source transmitter and logically represented in a Virtual

Concatenation Group (VCG). VCG members are transported as individual VCs across the

SONET/SDH network and recombined at the destination VCG receiver. While contiguous

concatenation requires concatenation functionality at each network element, virtual concatenation

does not.

VHM

Virtual Hardware Machine

VLAN

Virtual Local Area Network

A subset of a LAN. A VLAN is created by putting VLAN IDs in packets that indicate membership

to a VLAN of that ID. A Local Area Network (LAN) can have multiple VLANs within it, up to

the number of IDs available. Members (ports) of different VLANs do not see the traffic of

VLANs of which they are not members. A port may be a member of many VLANs.

VLH

Very Long Haul

VOA

Variable Optical Attenuation, Variable Optical Attenuator, or Variable Optical Amplifier

A device that corrects the signal strength differences that occur in the transmission line.

VSR

Very Short Reach

A SONET/SDH interface that provides a low-cost interconnection solution of less than 300

meters between routers, switches, and DWDM systems.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

W WAN

Wide Area Network

A communication network that uses common-carrier provided lines and covers an extended

geographical area.

Wavelength

The distance between points of corresponding phase of two consecutive cycles of a wave,

typically measured in nanometers (nm). The wavelength is related to the propagation velocity and

the frequency. (Also called lambda).

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

GL-23

WB

Wavelength Blocker

WDM

Wavelength Division Multiplexing

WDM merges optical traffic onto one common fiber, sending several signals through one fiber

with different wavelengths of light. WDM allows flexibility in expanding bandwidth. It reduces

costly mux/demux function, and it reuses existing optical signals.

WIS

Wan Interface Sublayer

WMAN

Wavelength MANager

WSS

Wavelength Selective Switch

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

X XFP

10-gigabit eXtended Form Factor Pluggable

A pluggable optical transceiver module that combines transmitter and receiver functions in one

compact, flexible, and low cost package format.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Z ZIC

Zero Installation Craft interface

An NE-embedded graphical user interface (GUI) application for local operation and maintenance.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-24 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Index

A Add Spans to Links, 4-48

Audit, 7-4

................................................................................................

B Bill of Material, 6-37

Bill of Material (multi-step), 6-38

................................................................................................

C Change ILA Site Name, 4-34

Change Service Parameters and Copy to a New Service,

4-82

Change Span Parameters and Copy to a New Span, 4-50,

4-50

Channel properties, 4-118

Close ONDP, 2-14

Computation mode, 7-4

Configurations, 4-17

Constraints, 4-57, 4-74, 4-86, 7-4

Create a Link, 4-46

Create a New Project, 4-9

Create a Relation, 4-78

Create an Optical Subset, 4-97

Create an SRG, 4-109

Create Services, 4-80

Create Sites, 4-24

................................................................................................

D Delete Links and Spans, 4-54

Delete Relations and Services, 4-84

Delete Sites, 4-29

Delete SRGs, 4-111

Design, 4-3

full network, 5-2

Design errors, 5-3, 6-35

Design inputs, 4-4

Design menu, 3-7

Design parameters, 4-115

traffic setting, 4-122

WDM layer, 4-117

Design results, 6-2

Dispersion Map, 6-6

Display menu, 3-4

documents

related, xx

................................................................................................

E Edge tooltip, 3-14

Edit a Failure Scope, 4-112

Edit Failures Scope window, 4-105

Edit Links and Spans, 4-47

Edit menu, 3-3

Edit NE Configuration, 4-26

Edit Relations and Services, 4-79

Edit Services window, 4-57

Edit Site Parameters, 4-28

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

IN-1

Edit Spans window, 4-37

Edit Spatial and Spectral Constraints, 4-86

Edit SRGs window, 4-99

Encryption, 4-5

Export BoM, 6-71

Export Design Results Excel Report, 6-45

................................................................................................

F Failure analysis, 7-9

Failures Report, 6-24

Failures Scope, 4-105

Features, 1-2

File menu, 3-2

Functionality, 1-8

................................................................................................

G GMRE Simulator, 3-10

GMRE simulator, 7-9

................................................................................................

H Help menu, 3-10

................................................................................................

I Icons

link, 3-15

site, 3-13

toolbar, 3-11

traffic, 3-15

Identify a Link on the Map, 4-55

Identify a Relation on the Map, 4-85

ILA, 4-31

ILA AGE, 4-31

ILA parameters, 4-32

Include/Exclude Links/Sites in SRGs, 4-110

Incremental design, 4-6

Inputs menu, 3-5

Install ONDP, 2-7

Installation

requirements, 2-2

Installer Welcome window, 2-4

Interface, 1-9

................................................................................................

L Launch ONDP, 2-13

Layer

WDM parameters, 4-117

License key, 2-2

types, 2-2

Links, 4-37

parameters, 4-39

................................................................................................

M Main menu, 3-2, 3-2

Manual network creation, 7-2

Menu

Design, 3-7

Display, 3-4

Edit, 3-3

File, 3-2

Help, 3-10

Inputs, 3-5

Link, 3-17

Main, 3-2

Misc, 3-10

Relation, 3-18

Reports, 3-8

Site, 3-16

Tools, 3-10

Topology Map, 3-15

Merge Spans, 4-52

Misc. menu, 3-10

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IN-2 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

Multidirectional A/D blocks

differentiation, 4-19, 4-74

Mutual Disjointness, 4-76

................................................................................................

N NE configuration management, 4-16

Network analysis

audit, 7-4

upgrade, 7-7

Network configuration, 7-2

methods, 7-2

Network design, 5-2

Network Statistics, 6-21

New project, 4-9

................................................................................................

O Open an Existing Project (.ondp file), 4-11

Optical design, 6-6

Optical design parameters, 6-4, 6-4

Optical Subsets parameters, 4-90

................................................................................................

P Part List, 6-39

Path Feasibility, 6-6

PGE, 4-31

................................................................................................

Q quality policy, xxii

................................................................................................

R Regeneration

favor, forbid, 4-19

related documents, xx

Relations, 4-57

Relations parameters, 4-62, 4-62

Reports, 6-2

Reports menu, 3-8

Restoration analysis, 7-9

Run Full Network Design, 5-4

Run Partial Network Designs for Links, 5-5

RWA, 4-57, 4-74, 4-86, 7-4

................................................................................................

S Services, 4-57

Services parameters, 4-70

Set Design Parameters, 4-125

Set Design Parameters window, 4-115

Share Risk Group, 4-99

shelf modifications

concepts, 8-2

Shelf modifications

interface, 8-7

Show Bill of Material, 6-37

Show Bill of Material (multi-step), 6-38

Show Equipment View, 6-40

Show Errors Report, 5-3, 6-35

Show Failures Report, 6-24

Show Graphical Statistics, 6-17

Show Line View, 6-41

Show Network Statistics, 6-21

Show Real-Time Fast Feasibility Criteria, 6-15

Show Selected Links Physical Diagnostics, 6-6

Show Sites/Part List, 6-39

Show Traffic Design Logs, 6-34

Show/Tune Links Design Results, 6-3

Sites, 4-13, 4-14

3R, 4-14

configuration, 4-16

generic, 4-14

ILA_AGE, 4-14

ILA_PGE, 4-14

multidirectional, 4-14

OADM, 4-14

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013

IN-3

parameters, 4-20

terminal, 4-14

Sites/Part List, 6-39

Span parameters, 4-43

Spans, 4-37

Spans parameters, 4-43

Spatial constraints, 4-86

Spectral constraints, 4-86

SRG, 4-99

Step, 4-6

Subsets, 4-89

................................................................................................

T Toolbar, 3-2, 3-11

Tools. menu, 3-10

Traffic Design Logs, 6-34

Traffic setting design parameters, 4-122

Troubleshooting, 2-3, 5-3, 6-35

................................................................................................

U Uninstall ONDP, 2-12

Update ONDP Version, 2-10

Upgrade, 7-7

................................................................................................

W WDM layer design parameters, 4-117

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IN-4 1626LM ONDP R7.0

3AL-75223-RAAA-TQZZA Release 7.0

Issue 4 March 2013